Episode 194: What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program? And Why Does Your Company Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process with April Beach – Masterclass reopening soon! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know the two types of Signature Offers and determine which type may be best for them

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. What really is a signature offer or program? Spoiler alert, it’s not just a common service you slap the Signature Logo on. No… your signature offer, program, course or process is something that sets your company apart. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses are always striving to be known, but there’s one true way to lead a niche and profit, and that is by developing a unique signature offer, program, process, service, course, membership, system, event, or deliverable which makes it clear for others to understand what you do, creates profitable results for your company, helps you become known and gives your clients incredible results. In this episode we dive into part 1 in discussing “What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program and Why Does  Your Company Need One?”

Highlights:

  1. Know what truly is and what is not a true, authentic signature offer or program
  2. Understand the 2 types of signature offers or programs
  3. Be able to identify which type of signature offer or program your company should create first

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process. 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m super glad you’re here because we are diving more, a little bit more step-by-step each week into one of my favorite topics to talk about.
So two weeks ago, we started talking about creating your services and making sure that what you’re selling in, what you have available to your audience is in fact selling right now, we talked about your primary offer and your primary programs and doing any sort of pivoting based on the crazy 2020 and how it has been. And we also talked about making sure that your services are solving an immediate problem for people.
Well, on this week’s show, we’re diving in more and discussing what really is a signature offer or program. And why does your company need one? And this is kicking up a brand new series that we’re doing here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast called how to create your signature offer program, service or process. And I’m super excited to geek out on this with you.
This topic is actually my Ninja skill and my zone of genius. And so over the next few weeks, I’m going to be sharing with you case studies from signature offers and programs. My clients have built over the years to inspire you, to see what’s possible in the huge result that you can make in your business by creating a signature process program or system.
And so this particular episode, we’re starting out and we’re answering the question, what really is a signature offer or program, and why does your company need one? And this show is for those of you, whether you are established businesses or you are brand new to this space, this show is for you. So that means that your business is anywhere from phase two to phase five of my start to scale business system.
If you aren’t sure what phase of my start to scale business system that you are in, you can just pause this episode real quick and go take a very short, quick question quiz@sweetlifeco.com forward slash forward slash quiz. And what that’s going to do is it’s going to tell you what phase of business you’re in on my start to scale up business system. And it’s going to give you a list of things that you should working on and focusing on right now in your business.
If you’ve been listening to this show for a while, you know that I try to attack the episodes based on the business phase, so that if you’re in phase two, you know, that this particular show in this training is for you. Or if you’re in phase four, you might want to opt out and not listen to certain shows. But today is particular show is for almost everybody across the board,
in any phase of my start to scale up business systems. So that means whether you’re new, whether you’re just launching or you’re ready to scale for you guys that are offline companies going online. This is a perfect episode for you to listen to this episode is for experts, entrepreneurs, and businesses who a want to know more about creating a signature offer B.
You want to understand the fundamentals of what a signature offer or program really is and what it’s not. And see, you want to know the two types of signature offers and determine which type might be best for your company. If you want to know the answers to those questions, stay with me here in this show. And as a super, very special bonus tool to this episode,
I’m inviting you to check out my signature offer masterclass. This is a class I first launched way back in 2015, 16, 17, and I am bringing it back. I’m so excited about it. It’s a step by step training to extract your expertise, expand your reach and explode your sales. And you can find all the details about your signature opera masterclass by visiting signature offer.com.
And when you add your name to the list for interest in joining the, your signature program masterclass, I am going to give you tools that you can use right now. So you don’t even have to wait. You can get started right away, and I’m going to give you number one, the components, it’s a list of components that every winning and leading signature offer should have.
And I’m going to give you a really short six minute video helping you kick off your creation of your own signature offer right now immediately. So again, that’s the awesome bonus that comes with this episode, and you can find that by going to signature offer.com, okay, this is episode number 194. Let’s go ahead and dive into the show.<inaudible> Okay.
Diving in here, we’re going to answer three really important and foundational questions for you regarding a signature offer and a signature program and helping you to determine really what is the right path in your business. And first of all, what really is a signature offer or program? So that’s question number one, what really is a signature offer or program? The long is a true signature offer is a program service method or a process that you extract from your own IP,
your own intellectual property, your expertise and your experience. So what, you know, what you’re good at, what your ju your zone of genius is what your zone of excellence is in that gives your clients predictable transformational results. So let me simplify that for you, a true signature offer or program is a process in which you create again, from your own IP that gives your clients predictable transformational results.
And it makes you known in your space. That is the official definition that I’ve given to a signature offer. And it, hopefully that will help you to understand exactly what it is and what it isn’t. But let’s go ahead and dive into it even more, a signature program, or offer, extract your expertise. It’s derived from your intellectual property. So it’s pulled from your experience in winning and in failing in a certain area in order to be a winner,
and to be an expert in something, we have to usually fail at it quite a few times until we figure out the ways to overcome it. Your signature offer is the result of that. It’s a ways you’ve overcome something. It’s a ways you’ve gotten yourself or other people really awesome results in a certain area. So your signature offer is pulled from your experience.
It’s nothing like anyone else’s. So your signature offer isn’t like anybody else’s because it contains your unique skillset, your systems, and your processes as true signature offer also disrupts your niche. So it improves or simplifies or changes the way things have been done to give better results, a signature offer, or a true signature offer and program provides predictable transformational results that people can count on.
And a signature offer a program meets your profit goals that your company has set. And it is something that you want to be known for. That’s what a real true signature offer program is. So let’s kind of talk about the flip side of that. What it isn’t a signature offer or program is not a copycat of popular programs that everybody else is doing.
It is not what just happens to be selling. And what’s trending right now in this space. And it’s not something you choose just because it happens to be your main offer. In fact, a signature offer is not something that gives people the same results in the same way that other programs and companies are doing it. So your signature offer program should be uncommon,
but it can solve a common problem, but the way you go about doing it, the way you go about understanding how to get people results is your intellectual property, your IP, your methodology. So again, a true signature offer extract your expertise into your methodology by creating your own unique content that becomes your program. It is not something that just happens to be selling it.
Isn’t something that is the first offer, just because it’s your first offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer just because it’s your only offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer. It shows signature offer leads the way in certain aspects and the goals that you set forth in your business. So now you might be asking yourself, Oh, okay, well, what,
what does that mean? And how do I know what type of signature offer to bill once you understand what type of signature offer you’re building, then you’re going to understand the goals that your business is going to set for that signature offer. So now let’s go ahead and I want to share with you the two types of signature offers or programs, they are a foundational signature offer or program or an influencing signature offer or program.
So the two types are foundational or influencing. This is a system that I created. It’s part of my service creation system that I watched about 10 years ago in once you understand which one you fall into, either influencing or foundational, then this is going to help you get more clarity. So I want to impact this with you here and break out the two types of programs,
a foundational signature offer. This is ideal for new businesses entering the market or established businesses going from offline to online, a foundational signature offer introduces you to the marketplace. It gets you on the map, and it helps you as a business owner to simplify your services and your systems, a foundational signature offer can be your first online offer. If you are going through the scaling up or the scaling online process,
or again, going from offline to online to grow your business, or it can be the first program or service that you’re introducing as your company is emerging, maybe into a new marketplace, whether it’s online or offline, a foundational signature offer can have huge profit results. Okay? So just because your business might be new, if that’s the arena you fall into,
or just because you might be new to online, it doesn’t mean that your foundational offer can make you a lot of money. It doesn’t mean it has to be some rinky dink offer. We just call it foundational because it’s setting the expectations for a new marketplace for you. It’s setting the foundation for how you’re first going to become known in a certain space.
So can have huge profit results, but they’re usually they usually are simpler programs. You know, they usually are not sometimes as robust or as long or as intricate as an industry influencing signature offer or a program. And this is because a foundational offer helps you as a business owner to gain confidence in what you’re doing and to test out your new marketplace, a foundational offers a great way for you to say,
Hey, listen, this is my area of expertise, and this is my experience. I want to go ahead and introduce this to a space and test it. So that’s also what a foundational offer does. And foundational offers are designed as that entry point and an introduction for both the company and the new client base to clearly understand the results you provide. So again,
this is new to online. This is a new company that could be starting from scratch, or it’s a program or a different way that you’re testing as far as delivering results to an established market base. That is a foundational signature offer in influencing signature offer makes you known as the leader in your space influence in signature offers are ideal to be created by experts.
So for those of you with extensive experience in getting people results based on your methodology. So an influencing signature offer is for those of you who have tested your content or your program numerous times in the past, even if it was one-on-one or an indifferent settings, you have tested your content. You’ve come up with your methodology and your system after feedback and time and testing,
and you’ve gotten your clients amazing results, and it’s time to expand your reach and your methodology to impact your industry and more people for good. That is an influencing signature offer. And so I want to share those two kind of basic paths. There are two, I call them tracks either foundational or influencing with you. And this is part of my signature creation system that I started teaching entrepreneurs about 14 years ago.
And once you identify, Hey, you know what, right now you could have an established business and you want to just launch your first online program or your first online course. It doesn’t have to be a 1216 week course. You know, you could just start out with a foundational offer foundational program online. It’s going to dive into the water of this new marketplace and test out what you’ve been doing with your clients,
maybe offline to see how well we can scale it to online. That’s a great example of a company who is ready to launch a foundational signature offer. This influencing signature offers. For those of you guys who are experts, your speakers, your writers, you are coaches or consultants of some kind, and you’ve gotten amazing results for clients in the past. And you’re ready.
You know, that the way you go about doing things is a bit, or maybe drastically different than the way other people get results. You have tested your content. You’ve created your content you’ve created, or you’re ready to create a system that disrupts your niche and extracts your expertise, your zone of genius, your intellectual property. And you’re ready to create content and build and create a signature offer or program that takes people from point a to point B.
And you know, that you want to be known as a leader for doing that. If that is you, you are ready to create your influencing signature offer. So those are the two different types of signature offers. And I just wanted to help businesses get clarity on that. And this is why we’re embarking on this new series, because this is a primary way.
My company helps businesses succeed is in creating your offers and your programs. And these are all the common questions that I get. And so I wanted to make sure I was pouring into you guys, our podcast listeners, and making sure that you have these answers as well. So what happens next? Next, we need to be able to identify what type of signature offer or program your company should create first.
And so the first question is how do you identify, what type of art for program should I create? Is it influencing or is it foundational? So first in order to answer that question, let’s identify whether or not you have a current offer that could become your signature offer. We never want to totally recreate the wheel. We always want to pull from your current assets,
from your current expertise, from all the work you’ve already done. We want to take a look at what you’ve already done, as well as what you want to become known for. Let’s just pause for a second and answer that question to yourself. What do I currently have or do, or content I’ve created that I am amazing at that I want to become known for.
And I really want to kind of explode this area. So that’s a first question to really identify and ask for yourself. Again, we don’t always want to start from scratch. The best thing we can do as business owners is using the things we’ve already created and turning them into something even better. So ask yourself is my current service or offer that I have something that I want to become known for in my space.
Does my current offer include my unique intellectual property or methodology, or am I copying someone else’s system? You cannot create a true, accurate, legitimate, genuine, proper, authentic signature offer. If you have just copycatted somebody else’s way about getting people results, a true signature takes your intellectual property and your unique methodology in turns it into your signature system or a process.
Okay. And then the third question to ask yourself is when people think of my business, is this what they automatically think that I do? Do they automatically think, Oh, I’m thinking about, you know, Jody, she’s great at whatever highlighting people’s hair that could be her signature offer. So, you know, do people automatically already think of, of what you do as your signature offer,
or do we also, in the process of creating your signature offer need to reeducate your marketplace is your signature offer an area that you haven’t tapped into yet that you haven’t established yourself as an expert. Yet, if that’s the case, then we’re going to be creating a foundational signature offer for you. So step number one is to identify whether or not you have a current signature offer.
Do you already have a signature offer? If you already have a signature offer, then we need to have a conversation about marketing it and positioning it as a leading offer that it should be. But in most cases, most companies do not. In fact, signature offers are something that is very rarely talked about. When we talk about building courses, we talk about building membership sites and writing books and speaking on stages and marketing on LinkedIn,
none of that can happen until you extract your content in that you create your signature methodology, your signature system, into your intellectual property, that is yours and only yours. It’s your methodology. Then we talk about what business model you build it into. Are you going to launch a course or a group coaching program or a mastermind? All those answers come later.
The first thing is identifying whether or not you have a current signature offer. So if you’re listening to this podcast and you’re driving the car, just answer, do you have a signature offer right now, or one that you would like to really emphasize and become your signature offer or not step number two, determine what you want to become known for what lights you up,
what makes you happy to do what expertise do you have that is within your established zone of genius. So we want to tap into who you are, your expert skills already to develop your signature offers and your programs. And then number three, choose if you’ll be creating a foundational or an industry influencing signature offer. Those are the three steps. Those are your three action items from this podcast episode.
And next week we are diving into the prerequisites of creating a signature offer. So next week, we’re continuing our series on how to create your signature offer program service, or process and episode number 195. I’m going to extract and share with you the prerequisites to building your signature offer or program. So what do you have to know first? What do you have to do first?
What are the principles that have be in place before you’re ready to actually develop your signature offer or program that’s going to help you lead in your space? You understand the fundamentals of what signature offer or program truly is. These three steps. We talked about identifying whether or not you have an offer, determining what you want to become known for, and choosing if you’re creating a foundational or industry influencing signature offer,
we’ll help you start the process of the work to create your signature offer. So your company can become known. And in addition to this whole series, right? So excited, I am giving you a huge tick start to get your signature offer program process, or system off the ground faster. So the bonus for this episode, don’t miss it. You guys,
I haven’t done a bonus, this awesome, honestly, and a really long time in this cause I know you need it. And I just want to pour into you. And this is my area of expertise. So I have so many tools and resources to give you in this area. I really want to give it to you. So the bonus for this episode is I’m giving you a short six minute video explaining what we talked about on this episode,
more in depth. Plus I’m giving you the blueprint of the components that every signature offer should include. So you’re going to get a list of components that are included in every single true, authentic, accurate, proper, legitimate, genuine signature offer. It’s a list and you’re going to be able to go through. And especially if you have an offer right now,
and you’re wondering cautious, this is my signature offer. You can literally go through this checklist and your signature offer or any signature offer needs to contain these components. And I’m giving you that totally free as a bonus to this week’s episode. So cruise over to signature offer.com to grab all that there. Plus you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list for my,
your signature offer and program masterclass coming back again soon. I’m so excited to teach this again, and I promised you, I would share with you some case studies of clients, who I have helped to develop their signature offer in the past. So I want to share these with you at the end of every single episode for the next couple of weeks, just to help get your wheels spinning and share with you what is possible in your space.
So the first person I’m so honored to highlight is her name is Eloise. She is the creator of the serenade program. And I worked with Eloise to create the first of its kind wellness and management program for surrogates. It was absolutely out of this world. We built this program about seven years ago, and she still leads the industry for surrogacy wellness internationally through her company,
family inceptions, international. It’s amazing. And then the second case study I want to give you is my client Lori out of Switzerland. I’ve worked with Lori for a while and Lori has created baby secrets. Baby secrets is her signature program. It’s a corporate benefits and wellness coaching program that includes classes and local resources for expats who are expecting children. And Lori is out of Zurich.
She’s absolutely beautiful. And I will go ahead and put links to both of these programs in the show notes so that you can get your wheels started to turn. So you can see one program. This is international wellness program, and the other one is smaller. It’s a corporate benefits and coaching program. The sky’s the limit, your signature offer. Your signature program can be anything starts with extracting your area of expertise,
your intellectual property, and giving your clients predictable transformational results that no other business champ. And I’m excited to help you do that. So again, the bonuses for this episode go to signature offer.com. You’ll be able to download the blueprint of the components of a signature offer. Watch that quick six minute video, which has even more than we talked about today.
And you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list to join my, your signature offer and program masterclass, which is coming soon. And of course all the show notes. And the quick recap of this episode can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 94. All right. So great to talk to you guys. I hope you’re having an awesome day and this message and these action steps find you wherever you are,
and they inspire you to create and become known for the area in which you’re called. Have you have an awesome day talk to you soon?

Episode 193: 3 Steps To Take Your Offline Business Online – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established offline businesses who want to launch online services but aren’t sure where to start. And experts, entrepreneurs or companies in my Start To Scale Business System”, phases 1-3.

Summary:

You know the potential to reach more people and expand your reach by offering online services. But when it comes to getting started in the online space you don’t have the time to get your masters in online business everything but you deserve to know where to start so you can make wise choices for your company and your future. This episode gives you three simple steps to take your off-line company online and gives you the wisdom and confidence and clarity in your first steps moving in this direction.

Highlights:

  1. Have confidence in what to do first
  2. Stop being overwhelmed by the fragmented and often times ill-advised coaching
  3. Create a game plan to take your business online now

Resources Mentioned:

 
Get Help Extracting Your Expertise Into Your Signature Online Offer
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love FASTA with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 193 here at the sweet life entrepreneur in business podcast. And I’m April beach, founder of the Sweetlife company and host of this show.
Thanks for tuning in with me another week, we are giving you another business training that many coaches charge thousands of dollars for, and I’m so glad to have an opportunity to pour into you as you’re continuing, or maybe you’re just starting out growing your business online. If we don’t know each other yet, I would love to get to know you more. You can always shoot me a DM over on LinkedIn or Instagram at Sweetlife podcast.
And if this is your first time listening to the show, go back and cruise back and listen to our trailer. Now it was almost 200 episodes ago that would release that trailer, but it will give you an idea if you are in the right place for business strategy and training today, we’re talking to those of you guys who have an established business offline,
and it’s time to bring your offline company and your offline services online. And in this show, I’m giving you three steps to start this process. And let’s talk about why this is important, just to make sure you’re in the right place, listening to the right show. That’s going to give you the right results you’re looking for. So you’ve identified, right?
You know, that there’s so much more potential to reach people and expand your offerings by offering online services. We’re going to talk about some different options of those online services today, because knowing that you want to do that, and actually then taking the step to understanding the choices that are available to you in the most efficient way are two totally separate things. And I get that.
That’s why I’m here recording this show for you today. So when it comes to getting into that online space, there is so much information and it can be incredibly overwhelming. And what we don’t want is we don’t want you launching certain online programs or offers or services or even courses just because everybody else is doing it. We want to make sure it’s a right fit for your company.
And all of that wisdom is what we’re pouring into you here on this show. At the end of this episode, you are going to have confidence in knowing what to do first, second, and third, to take your offline services online. You, if you have been overwhelmed will stop being overwhelmed by all the fragmented information, or you’re either getting information in two different ways.
It’s either super fragmented and you’re not really sure what information you can trust, or there’s so much information coming at you from software companies to business coaches about how to bring your business, that it can be totally overwhelming. And this episode is going to help you sort out fact from fiction. And it’s going to help you understand really what you should just be paying attention to here in the beginning.
And you’re going to have a game plan of what to do in what order to bring your services online. And this show just like almost all of our episodes. We have super amazing episode bonuses. So with this particular episode, to give you even more wisdom and information, I want you to download our totally free ultimate guide to online business models. So we’re talking about obviously online services here on the show,
but this is over 14 pages and it just totally lays out all the different online business model options from online courses to group coaching programs, to masterminds, even to podcasting, to help you have even more wisdom. In what direction you want to go taking your services online. So you can get that ultimate guide totally free by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide.
We’ll make sure we get that into your hands right away. Okay. So if you’re ready for these results and you want this information, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Okay. Three steps to get started taking your offline business online. So, first of all, let’s talk about what your offline business looks like. You either have a brick and mortar store,
or you’re used to providing services to people in person face to face, whether it’s hands on. And we work with a lot of healthcare providers, a lot of consultants and experts, and they want to go. And that could be you. You want to go from seeing people face to face and really expanding your reach to serve more people at a time.
And by doing so you create a business model that gives you ultimately more time and location freedom, as long as it’s done strategically. So if you have a current business that provides face-to-face services, one-on-one services on location, then this is the perfect episode for you to be listening to step number one, as you move in the direction of thinking, Hey, you know,
I really want to expand my business with online services. Step number one is to choose your online business model. And if you have been listening to this podcast now for almost four years, you know, we talk about online business modeling all the time. So if you want even more resources, cruise back to our podcast website@sweetlifecode.com and you can actually search all of our episodes for all of the online business modeling shows,
wanting to make sure, you know, that’s a tool available to you, but right now I want you to just hone in and focus in on what do you imagine that that looks like when you’re working with your clients? Not face to face, it could be in zoom could be by the phone, or it could be creating great content and videos for your clients and distributing it to them.
What does that look like to you? And what do your clients really need from you? If you listen to last week’s episode, we talked about what clients are really looking for, what buyers are buying right now. And people love on demand. People love having resources and answers and quick results at their fingertips. And so, as you’re thinking about creating your online offers,
certainly consider what is it that my clients really want in addition to maybe seeing me face to face. And some of your clients probably have been telling you this already. And if you ask your clients, they will tell you they’ll say yes, I want to meet with you virtually or yes, I would love to be part of a mastermind. So if you ask your clients,
they will tell you, they are always your best place to do. Research is going to your perfect clients are ready. But right now I want to dive into the three most common types of services that offline companies are launching as online offers. And they are online courses, online coaching programs and online memberships. You might have actually thought about one of these types of options before.
And the reason why offline companies are going to these is because they’re really great ways to already package the expertise that you have within your company. There are great ways to utilize your assets. And we’re going to dive into that here in just a second. But step number one is choosing your online business model. Let me give you a quick definition of what each one of these three most popular types are type.
Number one is by launching an online course. So an online course is a great way to take your established content, your things that you’ve already done. You know, in most cases with offline businesses and the established companies we work with, we don’t want to reinvent the wheel. We want to take your expertise and your assets and things you’ve already created within your business and just reframe them,
repackage them, reprogram them. If you will, to offer as an online course. And online courses are most commonly offered two different ways. The first one is called evergreen. Evergreen is where you would take your information. You would turn it into videos in that your clients could purchase it and buy it and absorb the information any time. So they’re prerecorded videos that people can go through any time.
And then the second type of online course is literally it live taught online course where you’re still taking the content. You’re still taking the information and you may teach this in a combination of zoom, live coaching and some PowerPoint presentations, maybe some videos as well. So the two most common types of online courses that offline businesses are launching as online services are evergreen again,
which is pre creating videos that people can watch on demand whenever they want. We already know people are buying those types of things. And number two, launching live coaching as an online course, I will say that for established business owners, I would caution you against launching really cumbersome, huge live online courses. If you’re still running your local business, unless you have a team to help you do that.
So just a little caution there. It can be really time consuming. The second type of online business model that many offline companies are adopting is live coaching. And this is where you take a group of people. Maybe you’ve served them one-on-one before and you start coaching them live online through zoom. You can provide phone consulting, you can provide FaceTime consulting, the medium and how you deliver.
It really doesn’t matter. It’s what you’re delivering. So this is actually providing live coaching without being face to face. And you can provide this one-on-one or you can create a group and provide live consulting to a group, either on a onetime basis for a specialty topic or on an ongoing basis. And the third type of business model that offline company are most commonly launching as online offers our memberships memberships are really amazing.
It’s where you take your expert content and you deliver it on a monthly and a quarterly basis to people in a community that you have created. Memberships are a great way. And we’ve especially in 2020, been working with established businesses who have community already around your business. Maybe it’s a brick and mortar store in creating a membership amongst all your customers. It is an amazing way to connect with them,
and it’s an amazing way to connect them with each other. And memberships is a great thing to consider. If you have content, if you have coaching, maybe there’s some sweet deal or discount that you want to deliver to your customers. And it’s also a great way to create a program for those customers of yours that want to access you on an ongoing basis for a longer period of time.
So they can achieve better results with the services that you deliver. A membership community is a great way to do that. So your first job and choosing, gosh, you know, how am I going to bring my offline business online is to consider what business model do you want to launch? And we just talked about the three most popular ones, courses,
coaching or memberships, but don’t forget to download the ultimate guide to online business models. So you can see all of that. And again, you can grab that by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide. Okay. Step number two is to develop your actual offer program or service. So you’ve already chosen the business model of how you want to deliver it.
Now we need to organize your assets and we need to take your ideas, and we need to take your expertise out of your head out of other places in your business and bring it in to creating your new online offer. So here’s some tips to do that. Number one is to sit down and extract your expertise. What are you known for? What are you great at?
What things have you already created in your business? We don’t want to recreate the wheel here with your first online offer in order to keep your current customers coming back to you. We want to give them more results in a different way within your established area of expertise. And it’s also going to save you literally months, if not years, to create something brand new from scratch,
right? So let’s take what you already do, and let’s scale it online with an online offer for you. So extract your expertise and start with what you already have. Go through your archives, go through things that you’ve created. Content you’ve already created in your business in the past and give yourself an opportunity to take an assessment and an inventory of all the great things you’ve already created.
I guarantee you, if you’re an established business owner, you’ve created some amazing things and some excellent content in your business, and that’s why people love you, right? So go back and see what you’ve already done to help you realize your potential. So for what you can deliver to people through an online program and service, and then also consider what people love the most from you.
If you are a brick and mortar retailer, and you have every single Monday, it’s a new shirt that you may feature on social media and it’s a new item drop, right? Well, people probably go crazy about that. So how can you take that and bring it into a new membership community? Or how can you create content around that to deliver into a coaching program?
Perhaps maybe you can launch an online course, helping people stylize themselves. For whatever reason, there are so many different opportunities that you can take your established expertise and just tweak it a little bit and create your online offer instead of starting from scratch. And then the last tip is what are the most common questions people ask you the easiest way to create an online course or coaching program or membership community is by going through in writing down,
if you haven’t, before you should be in documenting the questions that people most commonly ask you in your business and then taking those questions and the answers to those and turning it into your first online offer. Whether again, you choose a business model and how you deliver that, whether it’s coaching or a course or a membership community, maybe even a podcast, but go through and figure out what are the most common questions that people me all the time.
And that is a great place for you to scale what you’ve already done, extract your expertise and explode it into more sales and an exponential reach. So step number two is to actually go through and develop the content that’s going into your offer program or online service. And then step number three is to develop your first marketing funnel. So first you have to pick the business model.
Second, you have to organize your assets and your material and actually create your program. And third is to go through the process of creating your first marketing funnel. So your marketing funnel is where you’re going to attract more people than just your local faithful and your it’s, where you’re going to convert your local faithful to start connecting with you online. So your first marketing funnel is usually developed in a very simple way where you would create something free to give away that solves a problem,
but not just any problem, your something free you’re giving away online should solve a problem that you discuss and also solve within your new online offer. So create something free. It could be a short video and tips could be a checklist. It could be a strategy sheet, a tip sheet. If you’re a nutrition coach, it could be creating a sample menu for the week,
whatever it is, create something of value that solves a problem for your customers that relates to the service that you’re going to be launching online. And then step number two is to create one page on your website. That includes a form where people can receive that free item. And then step number three is to create a marketing plan, to share your content and to share your message across social media.
You could do podcast guesting. You could go to networking events, both offline, and now we’re starting Kevin’s to see more local networking events happen again. And of course you can run ads. There are numerous ways where you can get eyes on your marketing funnel and grow your list through that. The reality is is this first marketing funnel is important because it shifts people who might be used to only connecting with you online.
Maybe the only way you have sold people into your services before is having them sign a contract face to face, or actually seeing them face to face. So your next step is to determine how are you going to funnel people in to your new online offers could be creating this new first marketing funnel for new people, or you might consider creating a new online experience with a welcome page for your established customers saying,
Hey, guess what? We love working with you in person. Now we’re excited to also work with you online. And so it can be handholding your established local one-on-one client and helping them to onboard and get comfortable with your new online offers. We want your established clients to be the first ones to interact with your new online offers because they’re the ones that love you.
They’re the ones that trust you. And they’re the ones that are going to really help your new online offers grow. They are your biggest cheerleaders. So three steps to take your offline business online. Number one, choose online business model. How are you going to deliver your online services? Number two, develop your offer service program, course membership, whatever it is,
develop the content and the curriculum in there. If you struggle to turn your ideas and your expertise into world-class programs, that’s where my company, the Sweetlife company comes in to help. You can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com and we will teach you how to extract your expertise and turn it into a worldclass signature offers and programs. And then number three is build your first marketing funnel,
whether it’s a marketing funnel to move your established clients online, or it’s a new marketing funnel to generate new cold leads to your online services. I just can’t emphasize that enough, the importance of valuing the current clients you have and providing different ways for your current clients to absorb your established expertise before you go, and you create a brand new offer, that’s a cold offer to people who’ve never worked with you before.
We want you considering what business model your established clients want and need so that you can continue to pour into them and build those relationships. And we can create repeat customers to spend money again and again and again with you, once you nail your online business model with your current customers, then we talk about expanding to a cold audience and really expanding your reach and exploding your sales even more.
So just start with what you have, start with what you know, and start with the people you already know better than anybody else. Nobody knows your established clients better than you do. And again, start asking them questions. How did they want to work with you online? How can you better meet their needs through digital delivery of products, information, services,
and support. And those are your three steps to take your offline business online, choose your business model, develop your offer, build your first marketing funnel. All right. I hope you found this incredibly helpful. We really want to simplify things here for you. I know it can seem very overwhelming, especially when you’re new to the online space. If you’re in that place where you feel overwhelmed,
hit us up anytime, and we’re happy to jump on a business triaged call with you and get you started in the right direction. You can find us@sweetlifeco.com and all the show notes we talked about here on this episode, the ultimate guide to business models and how to learn, how to turn your ideas and expertise into your signature offer can all be found in the show notes for this episode by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 93. All right, you guys have a fantastic week, so great to pour into you and talk to you soon.

Episode 192: How To Create Services That Sell Right Now – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

Who This Episode is Great For:

 

Summary:

Does your company have a right-now offer that is selling? If not, this is the perfect episode for you. This show will help you choose the best service to sell right now and make sure that your offer fits into your longer term growth model. Offers are any service or program you deliver to your clients and can include coaching, hands-on services, virtual consulting, online courses, digital products, membership communities, programs, events and other services that help your company expand and scale. Get 7 questions to ask that will lead to clarity on what you should focus on selling right now?

Highlights:

  1. Decide if you can alter a current offer or if you should create a new one
  2. Know how your offer fits into your future scale plan
  3. Deliver a service that solves your customers’ problems right now

Resources Mentioned:

 
Request Invitation to Your Signature Offer Masterclass: Email april@sweetlifeco.com


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’ll listen To the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome to episode number 192 Here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m April beach. I love chatting with you. Thanks so much for tuning in with me for another episode, only eight episodes away from show number 200.
So thanks for being a faithful listener. And if you’re new here, it’s great to connect with you on today’s show. We’re talking about how to make sure that what you’re offering is selling right now. So how to offer services that sell right now is the official name of today’s show. And this is who this episode is for. This is for those of you guys who are established businesses,
and maybe you’re struggling a little bit with what you’re offering, maybe it isn’t selling, or this is also for you who are established businesses, and you’re ready to take the leap. You’re ready to strategically scale your company by considering different online services in ways that you can streamline what you’ve already done and scale it into a way that is more efficient and more profitable for you.
And this episode is also for those that are new entrepreneurs. And we have a lot of new businesses to listen to this show as well. And this episode is going to help you determine what first services you might want to create in your business. So in the end of this episode, this is what you are going to have accomplished. I want to make sure that you always know what’s coming.
So, you know, whether or not this is a great show for you to continue to tune into. I know your time is incredibly valuable and I respect that. So the end of this episode, you will be able to decide if you can alter a current service, or if you should create a new one, you will know how your offer fits into your future scale plan.
And you’ll be able to deliver a service that solves your customer’s problems right now, or you will at least be able to identify what problem your customers need help solving right now. So this is a perfect episode for you, and it’s going to help you choose the best services to sell right now and to make sure your offer fits into your longterm business growth models,
offers, or any service or program that you deliver to your clients. And that can include coaching hands-on services, virtual consulting, online courses, digital products, membership, communities, programs, events, and other services that could be an extension of your primary business, or they could be the primary business itself. So in this show, I’m going to give you seven questions to ask yourself,
that’s going to lead to the clarity that you need to know what you should be selling right now. So if that’s in line with what you’re looking for, stick around and let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible> All right, let’s go ahead and talk about how to offer services that are selling right now. First of all, I want to make sure that you have a very important and powerful tool at your fingertips.
This is for those of you that are looking to launch a portion of your business and taught online services, and you aren’t really sure how to choose them. You can go and download my ultimate guide to online business models. Right now it’s a 14 page guide. It’s very extensive and it talks about all the different types of online services and programs that companies offer and exactly how that affects your business and your lifestyle by offering each one of the services,
you can go grab that totally free ultimate guide by visiting April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide. And I’ll make sure that that link is in the show notes for you as well. So let’s go ahead and start really diving in here. So does your company have an offer that is selling right now? If you don’t, this is a perfect episode for you to be listening to.
So your suite of offers that you create in your business, you might have three different packages or two or a really high end package and an entry package. Every business is strategically designed differently. So you could have all these different things that you offer, but what’s equally important, especially right now in today’s business economy is making sure that you have a service or a program or an offer that people desperately need.
And that means they desperately need it right now. And here is why, this is what we know about are right now buyers. So people that are buying services, professional development, personal services, business services, marketing services, you know, design services, whatever it is that you do, healthcare services. This is what we know about are right now.
Buyers are right now, buyers are spending money. They’re definitely spending money. There are some people that are doing really well financially right now, despite the fact that sadly, there are a lot of people that aren’t, but the right now buyers are spending money, but they’re spending it much more wisely. So they aren’t not spending, but they’re choosing what they’re spending their money on much more carefully than they did 12 months ago.
We know that we also know that our right now buyers want to see a transformation. They want to make sure that they can see or feel or experience a transformation. And that transformation is much more important to them and their decision making to buy from you. Then it also was 1224, 36 months ago. So what do I mean by a transformation? That means that what you’re offering,
they need to be able to see a start to finish. They need to be able to identify. This is where I was before I worked with this company or purchase this service. And they need to be able to remember and identify how that felt, maybe some of the pain or frustration or even hope. And they need to be able to see, wow,
this is what it looks like in the end. This is what I paid for. This is what I got, and this is my injury result. So it’s incredibly important that what you’re offering is giving your customers the ability to see a transformation. There are a lot of great services that businesses offer out there. And I’m not saying that your company has to provide a huge transformation.
It could be really, really small, fast, quick result, or it could be something more comprehensive. But our buyers today, we know that they need, and they want to see a transformation with your services. And they need to understand what that transformation is before they buy from you. So if you are not clearly articulating what the end result will be from working with you,
they will probably not buy from you right now. You know? And a great example of this is my wonderful cleaning lady that come help me clean my house, frankly, because I’m a terrible housekeeper. I know what’s going to happen. I know what my house is going to look like. It is usually honestly a total disaster before they get here in three hours later,
when they leave, it is the best place ever to be in for me. Right. It feels good. And it smells good. And it’s organized. It’s not just clean. I mean, they pick up stuff and fold laundry. So I know what that end. Result’s going to look like. And I look forward to it and believe me, it’s worth every penny.
I pay for them to do that. So whatever your service is that you deliver, that’s the kind of feeling you want to give your people. And that’s what we know about are right now, buyers are right now. Buyers also want to make sure that every single service is all about them. It’s all around them. It’s around their time, their schedule it’s like TV on demand.
Okay? So you, as a business owner might be struggling to figure out how to do that within managing your own company and your own teams and your own families. I get that. And that is a struggle because so many customers want things right on demand. That’s also one of the benefits of launching online business models, because it helps to solve those problems.
So we know that our right now buyers want it all around them, their schedule, weekends nights, early mornings, whatever it is. And they honestly expect that from you. It doesn’t mean I’m telling you that your company has to meet those on demand needs. I’m just, that’s what they want. And that’s what they’re buying. And then the other thing we know is it right now,
buyers are digging online a year ago. They might not have been as comfortable receiving consulting or therapy or taking a yoga class online. But now this is a way of the world. In those of you who have already tapped into online business are in this gold mine. If you haven’t yet, make sure that you download my ultimate guide to choose the online business model.
That’s right for you. Again, I’ll put that in the show notes of this episode for you, because that’s going to really speed up the process to help you decide how to tap into the online business scaling market. It doesn’t matter if you’re a consultant or a professional, we need to be making sure that you are tapping into the way we know that buyers are buying now.
And the way we know that they will in the future. So in this episode, we’re talking about really how to create these services that are going to meet the needs of our right and our buyers. And so we want you to look at your current offers and determine which one is the perfect one right now for you to sell. Or maybe we need to add a new offer,
alter some offers, and here are seven questions that I’m guiding you through here. That’ll help you get clarity on what’s going on in your business and how to find the solution for your right now buyers. Okay. All right, here we go. And if you’re driving your car, you can always replay this. You can save this, you can stop this and listen to it later.
And of course you can visit the show notes for this episode, which are found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one 92. It’s number of this episode. So here we go. Question number one. And you can just answer out loud. If you’re at the gym or driving your car, question, number one, what is your primary offer service program course or product right now?
What is the main thing you sell? What is like your number one, go to package or, you know, delivery or service. So answer that question right now. Number two, is that primary offer selling? Did it sell in the past and maybe it’s dropped off a bit or is it currently selling? If you have answered your primary offer in it’s still currently selling and you are experiencing business growth,
the way that we would normally expect for you to receive experienced business growth, then you can literally turn off this podcast right now. You don’t have to listen to anymore. You have a lot of things to do in your life, tune in with me next week and we’ll keep pouring into you. Okay? So if you have an offer in it’s selling right now,
stop listening to this podcast, turned me off, make me shut up if you don’t, if you have your offer, but maybe it’s been declining or maybe you haven’t really identified primary offer that you’re selling or your primary offer, isn’t selling. Let’s keep going. All right. Question number three. Does your primary offer solve an immediate problem for your clients?
Again? What do we know about right now, buyers? We know that they want to solve a problem and they want to see a transformation and a difference right now. So does your offer solve an immediate problem for your clients? Now media can be relative. I don’t mean you’re going to fix their world in an hour. Maybe you can. It could be a couple of months,
could be six weeks, but we want to make sure that you are delivering an offer that is giving a transformation that in your client’s mind, based on what it is that you do as an expert, that they can see that there will be an end result and that end result feels fast and good. And sure. So does this offer solve an immediate problem for your clients?
If you answer that you don’t even have a primary offer right now during this question, I want you to be thinking of what offer could you deliver to your customers that solves an immediate problem for them right now. Now here’s where we pivot a little bit, and this is equally as important as everything else we’ve talked about is your offer something that you want yourself or your company to become known for a lot of times,
businesses will create services just because that might be the type of service that you offer based on your industry, but they don’t necessarily want to be famous for that. Maybe you as a business owner have a bigger dream for your company or a bigger goal or a different impact that you would like to give your customers. So ask yourself the question. Does your offer create a reputation for yourself in your business that you want to be known for?
Now, if you’re putting out a big fire and we’re creating a new offer right now because nothing’s selling it’s okay. If the answer to that is no there’s more years ahead. Okay. If your offer is selling or you need to just ramp it up a little bit or make some edits to it, or maybe alter your offer a little bit, then ask yourself,
the question is all this hard work that I’m going into in my team or my company is going into creating these services. Are they leading to what we as a company really want to be known for? And so I want you doing good work, smart work that has exponential results for your business in the future. Not just work, we don’t ever want to just do work and create things and do services just to sell them.
We want them to be a greater part of your strategic business plan. With that being said, does this service allow you or your company to operate in your zone of genius, where you are just flowing, where things are just thriving and coming together, you love doing what you do. You love being within this element of creating this result for people. Does it operate in your zone of genius?
Again, that’s more of a ideal if your company is struggling, but if your company really isn’t struggling and you’re looking to scale, that’s a very important question for you to answer. And then of course, question number seven is, does your offer make you enough money is what you’re settling, equaling the profit that you planned to make right now. Now this is a very right now question.
There’s a lot of different things that have happened for businesses and companies right now. And so if you are creating a new offer, because that’s what we’re talking about in this show to sell right now, we want to make sure that the value of that offer is going to equal the dollar amount that you need your business to generate right now. So you might want to make some tweaks to your offer.
And then along those lines are making sure you’re asking yourself, does this service, does this offer deliver an immediate result? Does it solve an immediate problem for my people, for my clients? So these are the seven questions. And when you ask yourself these questions, it’s going to give you clarity on whether or not you need to edit an existing alter,
uh, offer or alter an existing offer or create a new one. You are going to know how that offer fits into your longterm business model in stop yourself. If it doesn’t stop yourself, if you really want to make sure that what you’re creating is going to fit into what you want your company to be known for. And let’s make sure that the offer you’re creating to sell right now.
So it was an immediate pain problem for people because that’s what we know about are right now buyers. So going back through this, I’ll just repeat these seven questions really quick for you, and we can move on. I’m going to give you some tips here to keep going. So the question number one is what is your primary offer service program? Coarser product question.
Number two, is, is it selling question number three, is, does this offer solve an immediate problem for your clients? Number four, what changes need to be made to alter or improve or update your offer to solve an immediate problem? Number five, is your offer something that you want yourself or your company to become known for? Number six, are you operating in your zone of genius and number seven,
does your offer make you enough money? When you answer those seven questions, you are going to know exactly how to offer services that are selling right now. And you’re going to be able to take an inventory of what you’ve already done. I don’t want you recreating the wheel. I want you taking your expertise, your experience, your current services, taking a peek at them and making some tweaks.
Unless you’re a new business, we’re going to start from scratch and answering those questions is going to give you incredible clarity on what you can and should be selling right now in your new market. And here’s some tips. If you feel like you’re a little stuck here, this is more advanced business tips. For those of you guys that are established businesses. The first thing is is you should highly consider creating a signature offer that you want to be known for.
If you haven’t done that yet, consider what that signature offer could be and how you want to be known in your space. Tip number two, if you’re not sure what to do here, you guys ask your clients, get on the phone with people, pick up the phone, call clients, call past clients, call friends who might know people that could use your services.
Literally get on the phone with people and ask them, what are you struggling with? What problem do you have right now? And how can I solve that for you? And listen, be a really good listener if you’re stuck and you aren’t sure where to start listening is the best market research you can ever, ever do. So listen, ask questions and create solutions and tip.
Number three is if you haven’t yet now certainly is the time to scale your business by offering online services, programs, coaching, digital products, communities, so on and so forth. The list is endless. As far as the business model, you can choose online. The question is is what are you doing? What end result are you giving? The answer is not I’m offering a course.
The answer is not I’m offering coaching or I’m having an event. The answer is I’m helping people solve this. So ask yourself, what problem are you solving? And then ask yourself what sort of method or business model is best for my business that I can move forward and deliver these results through an online business model scaling. And so again, I have that resource for you to give you the understanding of the different business models.
And you can go grab that by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide, and you’ll receive the ultimate guide for choosing the business, my online business model. That’s right for you. All right, today, we talked about how to offer services that are selling right now. I give you seven strategic questions to ask yourself, to get clarity on how to choose a service or an offer.
That’s going to give your people results and they’re going to pay for it. And I gave you the link to download the ultimate guide, to choose the online business model. That is right for you. All of the information we chatted about can be found in our podcast. Show notes by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 92. Thank you so much for being a listener to this show.
I love that you’re here for only seven. Now episodes away from episode 200, and I really appreciate you sharing this show and trusting us to help you build your business. How do you guys next week.

Episode 191: 6 Key Areas To Reset and Refocus Your Business This Fall – Part 2 – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Free 3 day Reset & Refocus Challenge 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who feel fragmented and need a clear and strong plan to move forward for the rest of 2020.

Summary:

If you feel like your business needs a reset, you’re not alone. Fall is a natural time to reset and refocus, but this year these tasks are not idealistic, they’re imperative! In this episode, we’re continuing our talk on the 6 Core Areas of your business that may require your attention to reset and refocus, in order for your business to keep moving forward and be ready for 2021. 
 
In this show (part 2) we dive into core areas 4, 5, and 6; your mind, your network and your home or life. April guides you through strategic questions to determine if you need to reset, and gives you tips on how to reset each area if needed. This is another practical business strategy training that will give you immediate business results. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to choose a mastermind 
  2. Know if you need a mindset shift
  3. Get tips to separate your work and life if you have a home office
  4. Have resources to connect with powerful affiliates to grow your business

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Want to Be an Affiliate for My Products/Services? Email kelli@sweetlifeco.com


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi guys. And welcome back to part two of the reset and refocus your business. The fall challenge. This isn’t really a challenge, although we are running the live challenge this week. And so you are invited to join us.
If you are a subscriber to this podcast and listening to it real time, I’m hosting the fifth annual entrepreneur reset and refocus challenge. That really helps you make sure your business is on track for the last three and a half months of the year. I would love for you to join me in there. You can just cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash reset to join me in this challenge.
And so what we’re talking about today is the second part of six really important areas that once we reset them, it’s going to help your business focus and move forward this fall. And we always host this challenge. This is something we all as business owners need to do. That’s why we have done this so many years in a row, but this particular year is a mess.
And so what we’re doing is even more than what we usually do. Not more work, more focused, more important. I think then what we usually want to do of feeling good to reset in the fall. It’s no longer feeling good to reset in the fall this year. It is. We have to make sure your business is reset and refocused this fall without a doubt,
it’s time to do it. So welcome to the show. I’m April beach, I’m your host. And of course you are tuned into this wait life entrepreneur and business podcast. I am so glad that you were here. All the show notes and everything that we’re talking about on this episode and last week’s episode can be found by visiting and sweet lives. podcast.com
forward slash one 91. As I said, this is a continuation. So this is part two. So if you missed last week’s episode, episode, number one 90, I highly recommend you pause this where you are and go back and listen to last week’s episode. First in these two shows, we are talking about your services and your offer and your marketing and your systems.
And then today’s show we’re really honing into your mindset, your network, and your home and your life, and how to reset these important areas so that your business is going to thrive this fall. And I invite you again to join me in the reset and refocus challenge, totally free, and to download the eight page cheat sheet workbook I have for you to create immediate action and results in your business by visiting Sweetlife co.com
forward slash reset. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s focus area.<inaudible> Last week on the show I gave you tips and strategies to know whether or not you need to reset your offer, your marketing and your lead generation systems and your internal business systems today on the show, we’re really diving into your mind, your mindset, where are you mentally as a business owner,
we’re going to dive into your network, who are you connecting with? Are they valuable to you? And are you valuable to them? And we’re going to dive into your home office and your life. All of these things are equally important to your business, who you are, what’s happening in your life. All these things affect your business. And so that’s why they’re important for us to talk about on this show.
So let’s go ahead and start with talking about resetting your mind. Tony Robbins says that business success is 83% mindset, 17% strategy. You hear that again and again, we know it to be true. You can have all the tools in the world. You can have all the blueprints, the perfect business plan, but if your mind isn’t set on being successful and working hard and being amazing at what you do,
you’re never going to do it. And so it’s really important that together, we talk about making sure our mind is where we want to be, and that we are mentally advancing as leaders and as entrepreneurs. So area number four of resetting. Again, we talked about one through three and last week show area. Number four, every setting is your mind.
And here are some questions that I want you to ask yourself. What do you want to learn? Are you growing? Are you currently challenging yourself in growing as a leader, as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, as a human being, when we stopped learning and we stopped growing that’s when everything else kind of comes to a screeching halt. I’ve learned that about myself.
When I stopped listening to audible books, when I stopped challenging myself to go to the gym, when I stopped doing things in my life or for my mind, then everything else slowly kind of comes to this screeching halt. And so it’s important as we reset this fall that we’re talking about what’s going on in your head because this year has been really hard,
mentally, more than ever on a lot of us and most of us and our kids, I can tell you that I get what it feels like to be exhausted simply from having your mind overworking. And so we’re going to reset that so that your mind is thriving and that you are firing on all cylinders. So ask yourself, what’s something new that you want to learn.
What do you want to know more about, or what areas do you want to advance in your business, maybe in your personal life. And here are some tips to refocus these areas, this fall, first of all, you can identify what you’re missing in what you want to become known for. So, first of all, ask yourself, what do I want to be known for?
Have you ever answered that question? What do I want to be known for? When people talk about me now, when people talk about me 10 years from now, 50 years from now, what do you want to have been known for in your business? And so what can you, or should you be doing right now to learn more, to grow in that area?
That’s one question to ask yourself as you’re resetting mentally right now, here’s another one what’s holding you back from getting to the next level. Is it you, I’m not talking about things like finances or my team isn’t big enough. Those are all the business strategy, things that we talk about on the show all the time that you know, we implement for clients.
We’re talking about in your own head, what’s holding you back from getting to that next level. Do you maybe just need some inspiration or some guidance in that? Should you hire a coach? Is it time to join a mastermind? Is it time to invest in your own development? It can be free by bingeing books and podcasts. You can start journaling and paying attention to what you’re saying.
And you can invest in yourself by getting a high level coach or joining a mastermind of people that are slightly ahead of where you are in your business. When you join a mastermind, I recommend that you join a mastermind with likeminded people, that people that are a little bit further ahead than where you are. So you can learn from them and you can grow with that group of people.
So the first area to reset, which is reset. Number four, if you’re listening to both parts of this podcast is your mind, what do you want to learn? How do you want to grow in what areas do you want to advance? What do you want to be known for? And how are you going to invest in yourself to bring yourself to the next level?
You’re a coach or a mastermind through a program? What is it going to be? And if you can’t do it today, when are you going to commit to make those changes? Area number two, which is reset area number five in the big picture is your network. Who do you know that benefits your business? What businesses can you or your business benefit and who do you want to know?
So who currently knows your business that maybe you haven’t asked them to share your company, that their services, their operations, their brand could benefit your business, help you generate new revenue or establish your brand further in your marketplace. Are you utilizing those relationships? Or you can ask yourself, who can I help? It’s just as important to give as we hope to receive as business owners.
So ask yourself what businesses are out there that my business can make that business look even better by what we do, because that’s the way to build winning partnerships is by reaching out and saying, Hey, I want to help you be better. That’s the right way to start. And who do you want to know? What influencers or leaders in your space do you not know yet that you want to get closer to that you want to become friends with.
You want to get in that insider circle. And here’s some tips to go about doing these things. First of all, make a list of three people that you want to have coffee with and schedule at least one of those coffee dates in the next two days. That’s your challenge. Number one, number two, join a mastermind of likeminded entrepreneurs that are a little bit ahead of you find a mastermind of business,
people that are serious and that align with your values. Of course, little plug here. You can always go to sweet life mastermind and apply to join our mastermind. 2020 mastermind is going to be insane by the way. And that might be exactly where you’re supposed to be. The next tip for you when it comes to your network is to join an affiliate launch.
Some of the best friends that I’ve made in business are being part of an affiliate launch, where I was launching a program for another company. And these are my business BFS. They’re amazing companies that we all came together to support a third company launch. So have you ever been part of an affiliate launch? Do you want to be part of an affiliate launch being part of an affiliate launches?
One of the best ways that I can recommend making new business friends that are high quality friends to network with, if you want to know more about affiliate launches, check out Laura sprinkle. She’s one of our favorite people she’s been here on the podcast. If you want to join our affiliate launch program, you can simply email Kelly, K E L L i@sweetlifeco.com.
I’ll make sure all this is in the show notes for you, but either way I don’t care if it’s our affiliate program or somebody else’s being part of an affiliate program is an amazing way for you to network with other people, make good friends that are going to continue to develop your company and just to cut right to the chase. Stop expecting, to make real business friends and Facebook groups.
It’s not the place where relationships are being built anymore. You might create a lead there or a connection, but pick up the phone and call people, pick up the phone, ask people to have coffee with you and listen to what’s on their plate. And whether business is about that’s, how you’re going to develop a network that is unbreakable. And then the third area in this show that we want to focus in on to reset and refocus your business.
This fall is reset area number six, and this is your home office and your life. So this is the last area. And you know, I talk about this a lot here on the show. You guys know that I have run multiple companies out of my home for 17 years. It’s incredibly difficult. And just because, you know, we have home companies doesn’t mean we aren’t incredibly profitable,
serious businesses. And now in 2020, most companies are realizing the power and the convenience of actually running profitable businesses with large teams from home. But it does pose a challenge to you as a leader. And it certainly poses a challenge to you as a creative entrepreneur. When your work life is immeshed with your personal life, especially if you are not used to this.
So ask yourself these questions, how’s it working for you. You might totally love it. And that’s awesome if you do, but if other people are home while you’re trying to work, it definitely can cause distractions and problems. And so some things that you should be focusing on as we reset and make sure your business is in line with where you want to go is how can you separate your work and your life physically,
it could be making sure your office is in a separate room, but if you’re in a smaller apartment, I have a lot of clients that have really small apartments in Manhattan, then using some sort of a partition in your living area. So you’re not always staring at your work is a really important way to separate your mind and to keep clarity of thinking separate from your business and your life.
And here are some tips to really clean up the home work life situation. Number one, clearly communicate when you’re working and when you are not supposed to be interrupted. I don’t care if your kid is three. If your kid is 13, if your kid is still at home and they’re 23, if it’s your partner seriously, I don’t care. I have done communications at all those ages.
You have to communicate men you’re working say, please do not interrupt me. Here is a Lego. Here is a TV show. Here is a coloring book or great go for a bike ride, whatever that is clearly communicate when you’re working and when you should not be interrupted and set those expectations. And those times in advance. So everybody knows. Number two,
create a block calendar of certain specific areas in your business that you’re focusing on each day. This will help you to keep your mind focused when you’re kind of in like the mush pot of life and business, all in one, definitely I’m a big advocate for also remodeling or moving furniture and even a curtain or a partition as business owners, our minds never stop.
You’re always thinking we’re dreaming about our business. We’re creating things in our mind when we’re sleeping, who we are as entrepreneurs. And so it’s really important that you have a way if you’re working from home to separate. So you weren’t looking at it all the time, because your mind is going to need to rest. We need to give your mind a break so that you can create amazing things when we want to turn it back on,
because the reality is is never totally turns off. So we want to do our best to protect and give your mind rest. And then the last tip I have for you is to run Pomodoros. I did a little video on IGT on what a Pomodoro is, but in a nutshell, it’s running a sprint. It’s basically where you’ll work for 20 minutes and take five minutes off or you’ll work for 45 minutes and you’ll take 15 minutes off and you actually run these sprints almost with an egg timer,
or you can put a timer on your phone where you focus clearly on one area for a short period of time. And then you walk away completely and take a break. That’s what a Pomodoro is. Pomodoros are one of the number one ways that I have been able to be successful in produce as a mother with three children at home that rents two companies and has a podcast.
And so whatever your situation looks like, I can guarantee you that running Pomodoros will work for you and you can cruise over and see my IETV demonstration on that over at, at April beach life, which is my new Instagram handle, by the way, after I was totally hacked. Love for you to check that out over there. And I’ll go ahead and put a link to that in the show notes as well.
Okay. So today we talked about reset areas. Number four, five, and six for your business. Number four is your mind. Number five is resetting and refocusing your network and your affiliates. And number six is resetting your home and your office life, especially for those of you guys that have to deal with kids that are homeschooling right now. Now last week on the show areas again,
when one was your offer, two was your marketing and funnels and three where your internal business systems. And then today, again, we talked about your mind, your network and your home office and life. Now this is a lot of information. I know I’m throwing a lot of information at you hear on the show. If you can walk away with one question and one area you are resetting for yourself,
whether it is your mind or your home life or your network, one area you want to focus in on and really clarify it, simplify it so you can grow in it. Then that is a win. If you’re an overachiever and you really love to nail things and do them 150%, make sure you are joining me in this year’s reset and refocus entrepreneur challenge.
It’s totally free in all these questions and self challenges that we’ve talked about here on the show. Plus resources are given to you in a completely free workbook and you can join me there by cruising over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash reset. And all the show notes can be bound by visiting our podcast website episode number 191. All right, my friend, it is so great to talk to you again on episode number 191.
I can’t believe we’re coming up on 200 episodes here on the sweet life entrepreneur business podcast. Thank you so much for being a listener to this show. If you haven’t actually officially click subscribe, please make sure you do so. So you get these shows in real time because a lot of our episodes come with bonuses, templates, blueprints, cheat, sheets,
even challenges in coaching like we’re doing now with the reset and refocus challenge that most business consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for. And I don’t want you to miss it. So just simply click subscribe. So you’re always in the know, and of course you can get more information on how we can continue to support your business growth by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And I will see you tomorrow morning if you’re listening to this in real time at the live reset,
Challenging 2020. Bye bye for now.

Episode 190: 6 Key Areas To Reset and Refocus Your Business This Fall – Part 1 – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Free 3 day Reset & Refocus Challenge 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my “Start To Scale Up Business System”) who feel fragmented and need a clear and strong plan to move forward for the rest of 2020.

Summary:

If you feel like your business needs a reset, you’re not alone. Fall is a natural time to reset and refocus, but this year these tasks are not idealistic, they’re imperative! In this episode, we’re talking about the Core Areas of your business that may need a reset and refocus, in order for your business to keep moving forward and be ready for 2021. 
 
In this show (part 1 of 2) we dive into the first 3 areas; your offers, your marketing, and your business operations systems. April guides you through strategic questions to determine if you need to reset, and she gives you tips on how to reset each area if needed. This is another practical podcast business training that will give you immediate business results.

Highlights:

  1. Know if you need to refine your offer
  2. Be ready to fix your marketing funnels 
  3. Know the most important business systems SOPs you need to fix or create

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. This is episode number 190 here on the sweet life entrepreneur business podcast. And I made real beach super glad that you’re here joining me. And this is part one of a two part series that we’re doing about how to reset and refocus your business this fall.
This is a super important episode, as well as next week’s. Now, let me give you a little bit of background. If you’re new to the Sweetlife company or the Sweetlife podcast every single year for the last five years, I host the reset in the refocus entrepreneur challenge. This is a challenge that’s usually just a couple of days long. That helps you refocus the most core components of your business so that you can thrive every fall.
And this is usually something we do because in the summertime I do a lot of traveling. You do a lot of traveling things, just get a little sloppy in the summertime. When it comes to business here in 2020 this year, it’s just been completely different. So this reset and those three focus challenge might be even more important than any other year. We’ve hosted it because we’re not rebounding from a glorious summer adventuring or traveling abroad.
We’re rebounding from some seriously rough months as business owners and parents and entrepreneurs and professionals. And it’s really time to refocus your business. As a matter of fact, as this show drops, I am currently dropping my oldest and first child off to college. So there are so many changes and big things are happening that are really outside of the norm this year.
So as you will likely be going through the reset and the refocus challenge with us, I hope that you do. I’m going to be going through it as well, right there with you. And so is my team. We always roll up our sleeves and participate because these are things that we need to reset and refocus on in our company as well. So before I dive into today’s show again,
which is part one of a two part show, I want to invite you to join me totally free. And the fifth annual entrepreneur reset and refocus challenge, all you have to do is go to sweet life, co.com forward slash reset. And you’re going to get a schedule of live events that you can drop into, or you can catch the live replay.
And you’re going to get an eight page quick action, fast implementation workbook with a couple of sheets to help you know exactly how to reset your focus, your business, and the most important areas that are going to move the marker for profit team building growth and scaling this fall. So before we dive into today’s episode, I want to make sure you had the invitation to join.
Simply go to Sweetlife code.com forward slash reset, and we’re kicking off the reset and the refocus challenge on Tuesday, September the eighth. So make sure you join by then. Otherwise you’re not going to get in. Okay, let’s go ahead and talk about who this actual episode is for in next week’s as well. These episodes are for established entrepreneurs. So you’re in phases two to four of my start to scale up business system.
This means you already have a business and, you know, things might just be a little fuzzy or blurry or overwhelming, not as organized as you want them to be right now. And you need to refocus your business for the rest of 2020. So you’re offering your services, your marketing, your systems, your mindset, where’s your mindset right now. I think that’s a really big,
important part of business development, growth and profit is your mindset. We’re going to talk about that on these shows as well, your network, and really what’s happening with your home life. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know that I don’t believe or agree with the terminology work life balance. I believe in building businesses that are cohesive and that work in harmony with your life and with,
you know, being a busy and maybe even workaholic entrepreneur, like I am that it all flows. And those are the things we’re talking about here. So if you’re like me, you’re going to love this. Fall’s normally a time where we reset, right? It’s normally a time where the kids go back to school and we’re, we’re kind of looking at,
okay, Hey, quarter three is here. Where are we have we had our financial benchmarks. And so what we’re doing this year is of course, we’re looking at all those things, but we have to look at it through a little bit different glasses, just because of how weird 2020 has been. And a lot of us have different challenges than we have had in the past.
They are the typical, you know, regular resetting. There’s a lot of mindset and home office work strategy that we’re going to be talking about on these two shows as well. So as an entrepreneur, you’re fully responsible for the growth and success of your business. And so it’s critical that you make sure that the goals that you have are in line with your offer and your marketing and your systems.
And so those are the areas we are primarily focusing on in this show. So at the end of this show, you are going to have a clear understanding of whether or not you need to reset and refocus your offers, how your marketing and lead generation funnels are performing and what you might need to do to change those and any internal systems that you need to reset and refocus in a next week show,
we’re diving into resetting and focusing your mindset and your mental health as an entrepreneur, your network are you affiliating with the right businesses to help your company grow and also your home life and your home office spacing. If you’re in one of those situations where you’re working from home. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one nine zero<inaudible>. Okay. The first three key areas we’re focusing on helping you to identify how to reset and refocus these particular areas for your business are your offer, your marketing and your lead generation funnel and your internal business systems. So let’s go ahead and dive in, in just kind of take apart your offers. It’s incredibly important that what you’re offering,
what you’re selling, your services, your programs, your courses, your products, that they are in line with what your market is buying right now so much has changed. We’re looking outside the box of usual sales, growth and strategies. And we’re looking at your buyers, your clients with new goggles, right? Sometimes like beer goggles, like you can’t see clearly tell me,
you know what I’m talking about this, and you just really can’t see clearly. And so we want to clarify that on today’s show. So here are some questions that you should be asking yourself as we analyze whether or not you need to reset or maybe rebuild or refocus your offers to hit the benchmarks that you need to hit for your business at the end of this year.
So here’s some of these questions. And just as a reminder, all of these questions are actually written out for you with tips and resources in the workbook. That’s totally free. That comes along with our reset and refocus challenge. Again, you can join that challenge by visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash reset. So as I go through these questions, if you’re processing them in your mind,
awesome, the best place to process them is on paper or written down. And that’s what that supplemental workbook is for. So the first question to ask yourself is what is your primary offer service program course, or product? So what is the number one thing that you are selling right now? What’s the most popular thing that people come to you for? And the second question is,
is, is it selling now when we answer the question, is it selling? That’s a little relative, okay. Everybody’s business is different. Everybody’s geographic territory is different, but what I want to know is is your primary offer selling, as you would expect it to be based on your business, your market, and where you are geographically in the world,
everybody is different. So is it something the way that you expect it to be right now? The next question I want you to ask yourself, especially if it’s not selling the way that you want it to be right now, is does your primary offer solve an immediate problem for your clients? Right now in 2020, people generally are buying things that are fixing their right now problems.
Didn’t always used to be this way. This is what’s selling right now. So I want you to look at your current offering your current services. And I want you to ask yourself, do my current services that I’m offering my primary service or program or product. Does it solve a right now problem? And if your sales have been falling off a bit,
maybe it’s because you’ve had this amazing offer, but for 2020, it doesn’t solve a right now problem. So it’s certainly an important question to ask yourself the next question I want to, I want you to ask yourself, especially if your offer is selling, is, is that something that you want yourself or your company to be known for? All right.
So whatever you’re selling, is that what you want your reputation to be known for? Do you want people to say, Oh yeah, I know Joe, because he does this. So whatever you’re selling right now, especially honestly, if you’re new in a marketplace, ask yourself, is this something that I would like to be known for and is your offer operating in your genius zone?
So is the offer that you have aligning with what you’re great at? What you’re an expert at what you have experienced at what seems to flow naturally from you as a human being, all those things are very important. I don’t care if you have a hundred employees or it’s just yourself, all those things and making sure what you’re selling is an extension of who you are.
As a business owner is a really important thing because when you’re selling something that aligns with your zone of genius, it sells easier. People are attracted to you and you get greater results. So does the service you provide align with yours zone of genius. And then the last question to help you identify, if you need to make some changes to your offer,
this fall is, does your offer make you enough money? We always want to come back and making sure we’re building a profitable business for you. So does your offer make you enough money? Is it one that is a lower priced offer? So you have to sell more of it or is it a higher priced offer? And so you actually work with fewer clients and give a more thorough delivery,
and that’s all relative as well. How much money do you want and need to make? What are your financial benchmarks? So the first area we’re helping you kind of wrap your head around here and I’d love for you just to stop for a second, wherever you are, if you’re cooking or driving or working out and ask yourself is what I’m selling, giving me the results that I expect right now.
And if you need to reset, if you need help on figuring out how to reset again, don’t forget to join me in the reset and refocus challenge. Cause we’re going to be chatting about these things live, and I’m going to be taking your questions. But here are some tips that you can use right now to process or whether or not you need to reset.
First of all, if it’s not selling, you have a problem. We have to take a look at what you’re selling. That doesn’t take rocket science, right beyond that, ask your clients what they really need right now. If you aren’t delivering something that’s, that is a current problem for your clients. Consider scaling back, maybe a larger offer. You have to give them immediate results in an area they’re struggling with right now.
The next problem for a lot of businesses is bringing you from offline to online. We have a lot of resources. I’ll drop links for you. In the show notes of this episode, there are a ton of different online business models where you can take the work you’ve already done. Take your assets, take your content and turn them into online business models.
And I’ll make sure and leave a link in the resources for the show notes for you to download our ultimate guide to the online business model. That’s right for you. And we will certainly be talking about that in our reset and refocus challenge to give you more wisdom in that area, if that is you. So the first area of identifying what needs to be reset for fall of 2020 is your offer area.
Number two is your marketing and lead generation funnel. Okay? So let’s go ahead and zoom in a little bit closer here on what’s happening with your lead generation. The first question is, is are you generating new leads right now? If not, if maybe you’ve stopped your advertising or you weren’t posting as much on social media, well fix those things. Those are easy fixes.
We’re not going to talk about on a business strategy. You know what you have to do. So just schedule it and begin to reset those areas from a business strategy standpoint. Here’s some questions. If you are doing those things and you just aren’t generating any new leads, here’s some things I want you to think about. First of all, where are the leads you’re getting coming from?
What’s working right now with the leads that you have, have they fallen off? Are they coming in, in a trickle in, what does that look like? And what process, what Avenue, what experience are leads coming to you? And is this pathway where you’re receiving leads? Are you getting the results you need from these leads? Are they high quality leads or are they just leads?
I would rather, you have a list of a hundred great leads than a list of 10,000 people that really don’t give a shit about what you’re selling, or they’re never going to buy from you. That is a waste of your marketing dollar and your time. And it really helps. It makes it harder for you to judge whether or not you’re servicing the right people because the people you’re servicing might not ever be qualified leads in the first place.
So the questions I want you to ask yourself are with the leads you’re getting. Are they the ones you want? Are they high quality leads? Are they giving you the results you want and are your leads coming in, in a trickle or are they coming in, in a flood gate? The next question is, if they’re coming in in a flood gate,
are your online business funnels handling that? Well? So one of the problems that we work with companies on when it’s time to scale is not that it’s trouble gaining a floodgate of leads, is it sometimes they’re online, digital funnels are not ready for those leads. It’s just gonna all collapse on top of each other. So you want to make sure that your business and the tech side of your business is set up properly so that you are ready to handle the volume of leads that come in when you’re doing a great job with your marketing.
So the first thing I want you to do is go back and look at your internal systems. What does that look like? Are your funnels built properly? Are your landing pages and your forms in your email followup sequences and all these basic digital marketing funnels that every single company, whether you operate only online or in person or a hybrid combination of both, you have to have your online funnels functioning properly.
And so that’s step number one. So when we’re looking at your marketing, your lead generation resetting for this fall, step number one is to look at the technical side of your business and let’s make sure that they’re all running and flowing properly. Once we know that your systems and your funnels are built correctly, then we can ask our associates questions. Is it time to increase the number of leads into your business?
Should you start running ads? Should you start connecting with other businesses and building affiliate relationships? Should you increase your social media presence, maybe be doing more live streams. And we can talk about the marketing side of it, but many businesses just jump into the marketing side, but the structure, the blueprint of how people get into their business is going to fail when they increase those leads.
So for our reset and refocus this fall, I want you to ask yourself, is your company actually ready for a flow of consistent leads coming in, in when those right perfect leads do come in, is your company going to give those leads and experience that completely wows them and makes them want to be returned customers or by whatever it is you have to sell?
Because the online experience you’ve delivered is so awesome. They love being a part of what you’re doing. That is area number two, to reset and refocus this fall. And we’re going to be diving into all that as well, and the reset and refocus challenge. So if you’re totally new to digital marketing, this is a great place for you to start to get tips and strategies and software recipes to make this work great for you and a fix for you is to hire a VA or hire help to fix broken systems.
If that’s what you need to do, put that on your, to do list and go ahead and delegate that out so that you’re fixing your funnels right now. And the third area we’re focusing on for our reset and refocus challenge this year are your internal systems. So your internal systems have to be in place and flowing very similarly to how the technical funnels work in your business.
In order for you to increase your profit, sustain your clients that you already have, and really be able to grow in scale your business. So here’s some questions to ask yourself, do you have standard operating procedures created for your primary business functions? Now, I’ll be honest after launch. When we start working with companies who are ready to scale online, many companies don’t have these basic SOP in place to run a smoothly functioning online business so that you can scale.
And that’s totally fine. So if you’ve been in business for years and you don’t have any of these, you’re not alone. Let me just tell you this, but here are some areas. I want you to focus this fall because once we can get these in place for you, once these are in an order and you can delegate clearly, then you’re going to be able to grow.
So ask yourself these questions. Do you have SOP is created for your content creation in your content and marketing distribution. Do you have standard operating procedures in place for hiring people and onboarding staff for duties that you would delegate on a regular basis to your team members? Do you have SOP is in place for client onboarding or client management or client offboarding? What happens when you’re done working with the client?
Do you have amazing systems in place to wish that client farewell, as they’re done working with you, that is a way that’s going to make them feel so great about it. They’re going to continue to refer other people your way. And do you have standard operating procedures and systems in place for your finances, your bill pay, and are you paying yourself?
These are all basic SOP is that every single business needs to have in place in order for us to get you to that point where we can scale your business to the next level. So as we go through and we really look at maybe some areas of focus to help you hone in on what you should be working on for your company, this fall looking at all,
those might be super overwhelming. So just pick one area that you would like to start by developing your systems. And it could be content marketing could be marketing, distribution, team, building, client support services, or internal services like finances and bill pay, whatever it is, just pick one. And that’s what we’re going to do in the challenge. We’re going to get you started with one.
And once you get started with one, then the next one is easier. And the next one’s easier. And here are some tips to reset in order to write out procedures. The thought of that seems really overwhelming. So, Oh, I recommend that you do is take one day when you were performing these tasks and simply document, it can be as simple as bullet points,
the steps that you’re going through to perform these tasks, and then share that documentation with your team or have somebody else clean it up for you. You can also hire a VA that specializes in systems to get your systems in place. And you can work with a company like ours, the Sweetlife company, where we help you get your systems in place. And we give you templates to copy so that the systems are in place.
Whatever’s going to work for you. Pick one system that you would like to create that you know, needs to be created that maybe not having the system created has caused problems. Maybe you’ve lost money. Maybe you haven’t been able to grow your business the way that you know that it should be growing because you’re recreating the wheel every single time you do this system,
we’ve got to stop that. And so, as we look at part one of this two part series on how to reset and refocus your business this fall, the first three areas that we’re focusing on this week are also the three areas that we’re going to deep dive together in our three day live reset and refocus challenge. These are the areas I find where you might have questions.
You might need more help. So these are the three areas we’re going to work through together live. And the challenge verse one is your offer. The second one is your marketing and lead generation funnel. And the third one is your internal systems and SOP. And so that’s a recap of what we talked about today. Next week, we’re diving into continuing our reset and refocus challenge.
We’re diving into your mind and your mindset, your network, and your affiliates and your home and office life also really important areas, but we won’t be focusing on those areas in the live challenge. So if you’d like to join us for the live challenge, again, it’s totally free. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash reset, and you’ll receive the complete reset and refocus challenge workbook.
Plus the schedule of live streams, where I can support you personally. That was a lot to talk about. Oh my gosh, I know it just seems so overwhelming. Sometimes we dive into these things that we need to reset, but we are simplifying this. We’re not going to reset everything. We’re going to reset. Just a couple of things that are going to hugely move the needle on your business.
I don’t even know if that makes sense, hugely move the needle. You know what I mean? We’re focusing on your offer. What are you selling? We’re focusing on your marketing. Are you generating new leads? We’re focusing on your systems. Is your business a well oiled machine. It needs to be in order for you to profit. So join me next week on Sweetlife podcast.
Number one 91 to dive in more and join me for free right now, the reset and refocus challenge kicks off on September the eighth, 2020 by visiting Sweetlife co.com Forward slash reset. I’ll see you guys there.

Episode 189: Online Business Terms and Acronyms Made Easy – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide to the online business model that’s right for you

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for established companies looking to scale with online business models and new entrepreneurs launching online and feeling lost in the terminology and acronyms.

Summary:

Online entrepreneurs speak a different language and for companies who are looking to scale with online business models, the terms can be confusing and time consuming to learn. To help you be in the know and talk like an online pro faster, this show is a glossary of online terms made easy.

Highlights:

  1. Know what the most common online business terms mean
  2. Stop feeling confused with online business lingo
  3. Have confidence and knowledge to make decisions 

Resources Mentioned:

 
Join Our Community to Scale Online Faster
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate<inaudible>. Hi everyone. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 189 and everything we’re talking about today, including the bonuses and the resources that we’re providing with this show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 89. So if you’re on the go and you can’t take notes or you can’t pause and go to another website on your phone. No worries. Just remember Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 89. We’ll give you everything that you are looking for when you have an opportunity to go grab it. Welcome to the show. My name is April leach.
I’m the host here on the show and we’re coming up almost on four years of this podcast. Thank you so much to all of you. Who’ve been crazy faithful, awesome listeners for so long. And if you’re new to this show, I’m super glad to be connected with you. I teach small businesses and entrepreneurs how to grow their company by scaling online and everything we talk about here on this show are proven and trusted business trainings to help you do that.
In fact, a lot of our shows are so valuable that a lot of coaching and consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for the tools and the strategies and the action items that we bring to you here on this show. So I’m really, really glad that you are here. If you haven’t clicked subscribe yet, or if you haven’t clicked subscribe in a while,
please do. So. We are on all of your favorite podcasts. We’ll see devices including obviously where you’re listening to us right now. So just go in and make sure that you’ve clicked subscribe, and we do really appreciate all of the reviews. You guys leave us on Apple podcasts. So at the time of this recording, it’s the end of August.
And if your life is like mine, which I’m assuming it is we connect. And that’s why you listen here to this show. That’s means that things are about to get even crazier than they were before, regarding whatever is happening with school and your kids and running and managing and owning the company that you do. And so many things are up on the air and it’s just a hard time.
And actually when this show drops, I am on my way to drop my oldest son off to college. So I’m right there with you. And I want you to know that you’re not alone and we’re still here consistent behind you, giving you the tools you need to grow your business throughout all of the unpredictable world of 2020. So I just want to take a pause for a sec and just say kudos to you for being here for listening to this show,
whether you’re listening to it live as soon as it drops or you’re coming back to this, you know, years later, this going to be one of those shows. I think people refer back to a lot because it just really covers a lot of online business basics that don’t change. I just want to say you’re doing awesome job. So let’s go ahead and dive into what you can expect with today’s episode.
We are talking about online business terms, acronyms made easy. And so this particular show is for those of you who have established businesses, and it’s time to scale your company by utilizing online business models and strategies and funnels, or those of you who are new to launching a business, and you’re launching your company online. Here’s the deal online entrepreneurs speak a different language.
There are some words that we use in the online business space that, you know, I really actually have to catch myself sometimes when I’m talking to people because all of a sudden this blank look will come over their face. And I will have said a term or an acronym that just doesn’t make sense to anybody else, unless you’re already in the online business space.
And so if you’ve ever been talking to somebody or reading a blog or listening here on the show, and I’ve said something that just kind of went, Whoa, I have no idea what that is is April. Well, this particular episode is designed to fix that for you, because the reality is is that, that we don’t want you to be confused.
These things are not hard as long as you know what they are. So I want you to be confident. I want you to know what other people are talking about. I want you to know what you’re talking about. I want you to know what you’re looking for in certain functions of software and in website things that we’re going to be discussing today. And it all comes back to understanding the terminology and the acronyms that are used to describe functionality of software in different results and benchmarks.
Frankly, you need to hit in your business in order for it to grow. So the end of this episode, you’re going to know what the most common online business terms mean. You’re going to stop feeling confused if you’ve felt confused before with all this online business lingo, and you’re going to have the confidence to move forward, continue in conversations, ask intelligent and educated questions.
Now that you’re kind of past this entry level threshold of online business terms. And I do have a resource for you today. So if you’re just getting into online business scaling, if you’re taking your established business and you’re wondering what to do, should I launch a course? Should I launch a video series? Should I launch a membership or a digital, or even an in person type of retreat?
Some of you guys are even wondering, should I launch a podcast? I have a completely free 14 page resource for you. It’s called the ultimate guide to the online business model. That’s right for you. You can go grab that in our website for the show notes again, which can be found@lifepodcast.com forward slash one 89. So to give you more clarity on actually what you’re building and how you’re scaling your company,
today’s show, make sure that you go grab that ultimate guide to online business models in our podcast, show notes totally free, and that will save you years of time and really thousands of dollars of building the wrong kind of online business. Okay. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Okay. Today we’re talking about online business terms made easy and I’m going to go through,
I’m good. Literally going to name the term and give you the definition of it. So it’s just like English one Oh one, except for, for online business and making sure that, you know what things mean. I’ll give you some examples of things so that you can listen to this show and get out of here and understand all the weird language of online business owners.
So the very first thing I want to cover is the term business model. So a business model is the type of business you’re building. Your business model is how you serve clients and how you make money. So what services you offer, how you deliver those services and what actually does that exchange of delivery look like some different examples of business models are in-person services delivered,
virtual services delivered. And again, I gave you that whole entire go grab the ultimate guide to online business models. We have masterminds, we have courses, we have membership sites. We have webinars, whether they’re recorded or on demand, the sky is the limit. And you really need to understand what your business model is, or you need to understand what the injuries result that a business model is going to give your company in order to scale smart.
We don’t want you to just going out there and launching a course cause everybody else is doing it because it’s not necessarily actually in a lot of cases, even the right thing to do to scale and grow your company. So understanding term number one is your business model. Again, that is how you make money, how you serve clients and what that delivery of service looks like.
Next term is lifestyle business. Now this gets a little confused and it’s not a really common online term, but I wanted to throw it in here because if you are a listener to the show, you know that I’m a lifestyle business development expert, and that might seem a little confusing. So I just wanted to clarify that to you and lifestyle business is creating a business model that works with your life.
It’s the way you plan to live your life and then reverse engineering that to build a company that’s going to get you there. It doesn’t mean that the business itself is necessarily a lifestyle business. So you can have a lifestyle business. It gives you the owner, the freedom to be with your family and hang out with your kids more and travel, whatever that looks like for you.
But the business itself, you know, you don’t have to sell surfboards the business itself, whether you’re in marketing or consulting or, you know, video editing, whatever it is that you do, the business itself doesn’t have to be lifestyle focused, but you are building a business that is designed around your lifestyle. And hopefully that kind of clarifies that a little bit.
As a matter of fact, 90% of the companies that I work with to help them grow and scale are not actual lifestyle businesses, but the owners of those companies want a business. That’s going to give them that lifestyle that they want to, hopefully that clarifies that a little bit for you. The next term is I see a, I see a stands for ideal client avatar.
This is used a lot, and you’re going to hear it a lot, especially when you’re new to the online business space, your ideal client avatar, or your ICA, but really the perfect clients that you are called to serve that need, want your offers. So they’re very specific people. This is a very specific set of grouping of people that are ideal to buy your product or buy your services.
That is your ICA. So if you ever hear that term thrown around, if somebody is saying, Hey, well, you know, what are you marketing to? And what are you selling? And who’s your ICA. It means what is the specific subset of people that need and want what you have the next term is IP, which stands for intellectual property.
So this is turning your ideas and your services and your methods. It could also be your secret sauce, your formula, your steps of delivery into your intellectual property. So intellectual property protections allow for creators and owners like you to actually go ahead and make sure they patent and trademark your process. So you don’t necessarily have to do that, but intellectual property,
it’s connected to the ownership of things that are created from your mind. So an example of intellectual property is my start to scale business system, or in the past, it’s been called the sweet life entrepreneur roadmap. They’re my five steps that I share here on the show. A lot that take people from the beginning of your business, all the way through the end of that life cycle of a successful company,
growth over a period of years, that’s my intellectual property. It’s my system. It’s my methodology. I own that. So if you have a method or a system or something, that’s your secret sauce. That is your intellectual property. So the term IP is thrown around a lot, both online and offline when it comes to the ownership of things that are created by your mind,
your methodology, your systems, the next term, which is really important for those of you guys, for starting out, you’re brand new in business. This is something you have to know this term. And this term is M VP, not most valuable player. It actually stands for a minimum viable product. And your minimum viable product is when you develop your ideas into your new product,
your first offer and everything is being sold sufficiently to satisfied customers. So this product is designed and developed. Usually after some feedback from your first customers, your minimum viable product is your minimum service. That has to be proven in order for you to realize that your company is and will be a success. So it’s a very first offer or your first program,
your first package of services or your first product that you’ve created. We have to prove that it is at least minimum leave viable within your market space. So are people buying it? That’s your MVP. You have to hit your MVP. It is the one of the first challenges to overcome as a new business owner. The next term is lead magnet, and this is getting more into marketing.
So your lead magnet is something of high value that you give away for free, that people are willing to give you their name and their email contact information for sometimes their address. And some other information lead magnet is also referred to by some online coaches, as freemium or freebie. The reason why I don’t love that term, and we don’t use that term here on this business show is because your lead magnet is,
I said in the initial definition needs to be of high value. So I’ve done tons of different podcasts on lead magnets and how to create them of high value. So I’m not going to go on squirrel tangent right now, but you might have heard the term freemium or freebie. And those are people that give away kind of crappy stuff, free expecting to grow their lists.
That’s not going to grow your list by the way, it has to be something of high value to get high quality leads. So your lead magnet is something that you create to give away could be a video series. It could be a download. It could be a, a white paper, something of high value to prospects to gather their information. The next term is called conversion tool.
It’s also called the conversion product. This refers to how you turn the leads on your list, the names and the email address on your list and your database into paying clients. So the lead magnet brings them in and gives you the lead, but then we have to still convert them into paying clients. And a conversion tool is usually a little bit different,
a little bit more contact, more relationship based than a lead magnet. Examples of a conversion tool are live webinars, phone calls, or discovery calls, triage calls, personal assessments. It can also be just a sales page. You can have a great sales page that converts your leads into buyers. It could be a shop page. Those things are applicable as well,
but the conversion product is where you take the lead and turn them into buyers sometimes based on what it is your company does, we don’t even really need the lead magnet so much. We might be able to just take cold subscribers and turn them into buyers just with a conversion product. And if you don’t know, a cold subscribers are coming up, okay,
the next term is called a funnel. Now this is thrown around all the time. There are a bunch of different types of funnels. You guys, there are marketing funnels and sales funnels and product funnels. I’m going to give you the term here, understanding in expecting that many of you are just entering the phase in your business where you’re ready to grow it online.
So we’re going to talk about it, actual marketing lead generation funnel here. And I’m going to give you the definition for this. This refers to the building of landing pages on your website, where people can opt in and fill out a form and give you their information. And it refers to the connecting of the rest of your software technology to give them what you have promised.
So a funnel is all of your marketing. Literally imagine like a tornado. And on the top is all of your marketing. It’s all of your social media posting. They might see something that interests them. Example, your lead magnet might interest them. They say, Oh, that’s a really high value thing. I think I want that. And they’re going to go to a landing page that ideally should be built on your website,
where they give their name and email address to get that high value lead magnet. And then what happens next is you send them an automatic email. It says, here you go. Here is the thing that I promised you I’d give you after you gave me your name and email address. So the next part of that funnel is actually that welcome email and the delivery of whatever you promised.
And then it’s also sending them to a thank you page saying, Hey, thank you so much for giving me your contact information. We talked about it two weeks ago here on the show that receiving somebody’s lead is a privilege and you need to care for it. Very importantly, that’s not even a word. You need to really care about people to give you their name and email address.
That’s what I’m saying. The funnel is creating the pages and connecting together the technology, the landing page, the email marketing, and the thank you page to make sure that the delivery of what you promised is done well, that is the tech side of building a funnel. So when we’re talking about funnels, yes, there’s marketing strategy. Yes. There’s what you say and what you’re giving in this definition.
I’m giving you this, the specifics of the tech side of actually building a funnel. It includes your landing page. It includes a thank you page and includes an automatic email that goes out to give somebody what you promised. Okay. Now let’s go into warm and cold audiences. So audience are people who have never heard of your business before. And a warm audience are people who are already familiar with your brand.
So if you hear those two different terms thrown around, or if you’re planning doing an ad campaign, somebody who’s helping you with that might say, are we running these ads to a cold audience or a warm body? And that is the difference. Okay. Three more terms, are you with me? And by the way, all of these terms are going to be written out for you.
For those of you guys who are in our online business community and our app over at mighty house, you can join for free. I’ll put a link in the show notes, or you can just go to sweet life, community.com. If you’re like, Oh my gosh, I want to, you know, write all these down. I’m going to go ahead and upload all these terms just right into our community app.
So for those of you guys who are joined there with us@sweetlifecommunity.com, you don’t even have to opt into it. I’m just going to put all these terms there for you so you can always reference, okay. The next term is S E O S E Oh, stands for a search engine and optimization. It basically means how visible is your website or organically to search engines like Google.
So are people going to your website, are people Googling things or searching for things? And is your website coming up S E O like the terminology for it? Search engine optimization is the practice of increasing the quantity and the quality of the traffic to your website, through organic search results. So this doesn’t mean pain to have your site show up on Google AdWords.
These are things that you do within the copy of your site tags within your site. There are tons of different ways that you can optimize your organic search results for your website and you need to, and that is what we call SP Oh, the next terminology is copy. So the next term is, copy. We hear this all the time and we’ll work with new clients.
And you know, I have to be careful again, I’ll say, okay, give us the copy for your website in the division of my company, where we build Kajabi websites, I’ll say, give us, you know, don’t forget, you need to have a copy of your website. And sometimes new businesses will be like, Oh my gosh, what are you talking about?
What is that? So copy is just your text. Copy. It can refer to the text and your website. It can refer to the text and your social media posts. It can refer to the text in your email, body or other places. It’s literally just the writing of your text there. The words you write. And I will say that every company should have a good copywriter as an essential part of your team.
There are people that have a gift for copywriting, and there are people who don’t. So if you really want to grow your company online, it is going to be important that you learn how to become a good copywriter, or that would be one of the top priority roles I would recommend for you. If I was working with you to scale your business is bringing a really great online sales and marketing copywriter aboard your team.
So copy, just reverse to your text. And then the last term I want to cover is swipe files or swipe copy. So this refers to texts and images created by other companies that you’re allowed to swipe like swiper, no swiping, except for this is like swiper. Yes. Swiping those of you that have older kids like me. You know what I’m talking about?
So this basically means when you are promoting something in conjunction with somebody else, that company may send you what’s called swipe copy or swipe files. They’re literally pre done social media posts that you can just swipe and put out on your own social media to make your life easier. So swipe, copy and swipe files literally means that you can take it and steal it and copy it.
And that’s what it’s designed for. So today we covered a lot of online business terms and acronyms that we usually find that companies new to the online space aren’t really familiar with. We defined business model. We define lifestyle business. I see a, I P am VP. So again, ICA ideal client avatar, IP, intellectual property, MVP, your minimum viable product or service lead magnet,
conversion tool funnel, warm and cold audience. S E O copy and swipe files. Wow. Okay. That was your online business. One Oh one glossary class. I hope you guys, this is very, very helpful. You know, we’re here to help you. We’re here to level up your entrepreneurial IQ because you are amazing at what you do and no successful business owner has time to sit there and wonder what a stupid acronym is.
So we’re just going to tell you, because I know you don’t have time to figure it out and we are here to make you a success. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. Let me go ahead and recap a real quick, where you can find the resources that we’ve talked about. First of all, you are invited to join our online business owners and entrepreneur app.
It’s not a Facebook group anymore. We dumped Facebook months ago. Thank heavens. We now have a custom community app where you can create your own business profile and network with other businesses and get tools here from the show. And you can join that for free by visiting Sweetlife community.com. I’m going to drop in all of these terms into that app, for those of you guys who are in there.
So if you’re listening on the go and you want to come back and reference it, make sure that you join us in our app also for you. Go ahead and grab our online business model guide. So I have 14 pages of the ultimate guide to choosing the online business model. That’s right for you. You can get that in the show notes of this episode by visiting sweet life podcast.com
forward slash one 89. Okay. I hope you guys have an amazing turnover of the month at the end of this show. We’re rolling over from August to September, and this means you have three months left to close out this year, strong and prepare for 2021 here on the show. We’re going to be working on a lot of 2021 prep and helping you like we do at the end of every year,
prepare your business for the next year, prepare your signature offers, level up your marketing, and really scale your business online. So make sure that you’re subscribed because we are about to dive in and roll up our sleeves with you even more over the next 12 weeks to make sure that 2021 is the best year yet. And sure as shit, all of us need that.
Oh my gosh. All right. Well, you guys have an awesome week. Thank you again for tuning into the show. I’m April beach. 

Episode 188: How To Self Publish Your Book To Grow Your Business – with Alexa Bigwarfe and April Beach

Alexa Bigwarfe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App

Who This Episode is Great For:

Small business owners who want to write a book but need to know the steps, how to approach the process, and the ins and outs of self-publishing. If you’re considering self-publishing a book but you don’t know where to start, you’ll leave this episode with clarity and simple steps to take action. 

Summary:

Learn the difference between self and traditional publishing, what your options are to sell a self-published book, the benefits of self-publishing, well-known influencers who’ve chosen to self publish, as well and the 4 steps to start self-publishing your book! If you have a book in you but you aren’t sure where to start when it comes to self-publishing, this is the podcast episode to binge with guest expert Alexa Bigwarf, founder of Write|Publish|Sell and Women In Publishing Summit. 

Highlights:

  1. Know the 4 steps to self-publishing your book
  2. Understand the differences between self and traditional publishing
  3. Get insider secrets about creating your own self-publishing imprint
  4. Understand the connection between brand consistency in your book and business design

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to the sweet life. When you were in business podcast, this is episode number 188 in everything we’re talking about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88,
because we’re giving you a ton of resources. Like we usually love to do here on this podcast. If you, and I don’t know each other yet, my name’s April beach. I help entrepreneurs grow and scale their business online and develop their internationally leading suite of signature offers. One of the things that you get here on the show, our business strategies you can take to the bank.
So every one of our experts is vetted and I myself have been coaching entrepreneurs to grow and scale their business for over 24 years, we are so glad that you are here. And today on the show, I’m really passionate about this topic and our guests. I’ve become a really good friend with already in a quick period of time, virtually. And I’m super excited to introduce you to her.
Now, let me give you a little bit of background story. You might not know this, but one of the ways that I grew one of my first companies was by self publishing a book, and it was really powerful. You guys, as a matter of fact, this book sold copies everywhere and still to this day, that company, the secondary business consulting firm that I own it’s called baby planner,
inc leads the industry in business consulting for companies that market to new unexpecting families. And the reason why I still have that reach and notoriety in that space is because they started out by self publishing a book on my expertise in that niche, niche, whatever you want to call it, right? But here is the deal. Here’s the truth. I made a ton of mistakes and some of the mistakes that I made ended up costing me a lot of money and ended up costing me a lot of time.
And if I knew more about what I was doing, instead of just doing it and winging it, then I think that my results could have been a lot better or at least a lot less painful. And so today on the show, Alexa, big Wharf is here and she’s going to walk you through the power of self publishing a book you’re going to be blown away when you hear some of the most well known influencers that we all like love and follow and really admire in that they have chosen to go.
The self publishing route. Alexa is a USA today, bestselling author speaker, and publishing partner. She coaches others and offers publishing solutions to those who want to grow their business and share their story through writing a book. She’s the founder of write, publish, sell Kat biggie, press purple butterfly, press Chrysalis, press, and the women in publishing summit,
which I’m so excited to be able to speak at her summit coming up here in spring of 2021. And so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. You are going to know the quick start steps to publish your book. The difference between self publishing versus going through a traditional publisher and actually getting a literary agent. So we’re hashing out all of this for you today on the show.
And you’re also going to know how and why you can use a book to increase your known well known expertise in your space. So a lot of great things coming your way. This is a great show for those of you guys who are new in business, and you’re just trying to start your platform. And it’s especially an incredibly good episode for you to listen to.
If you have been in business, you have a platform, but you’re what we call like the best known secret. We need to get your voice and your expertise established even more in your space. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of the show notes again, can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88. And if you haven’t yet be sure to join our new online community business networking app.
It’s totally private. If you haven’t heard we’ve ditched Facebook groups, we’re super excited about it. You can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com, where you’re going to get all your podcast insights and bonuses in there. All right, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> All right. You guys welcome back to another sweet life entrepreneur business and podcast episode.
And I’m here with my new friend, Alexa, big war, and we met on Instagram. I was really happy. You know, I’ll be really honest. I don’t meet a lot of people on Instagram, but I totally just want to hang out with and have coffee all the time. But Alexa was one of them. And since then we’ve had a chance to connect deeper and I’ve learned more about what she does and frankly,
you guys really need to know what she does. So Alexa, just introduce yourself here. Welcome to the sweet life podcast. I’m so glad that you have given us a chance to hear all about your expertise. Well, thank you so much for having me and I feel the same way. I mean, I found you, we started connecting whatever, and then of course I do what I always do.
I obsessively like Googled everything, started listening to your podcast and was like, Oh my gosh, she’s saying all the things I need to hear right now. So that’s fantastic. I’m a writer, an author, an author coach, a publisher and a mom, which is a very important part of my story because I didn’t set down this path. I never thought about running my own business or ever even being an entrepreneur.
And sometimes, literally life gives you lemon and you can choose to make lemonade or you can choose to fall to pieces. And without going into all the background, in a nutshell, we lost an infant daughter. She was one of a set of identical Twins and she passed away at two days old. And that took me to blogging. I mean, as you can imagine,
going through anything like that, like I just started, I had, I’m a passive aggressive person and I didn’t necessarily want to share all my feelings face to face with people, but I had a lot of feelings that I wanted to be sharing. So I started blogging and writing about grief and loss and writing about twin to twin transfusion syndrome, which is what they had writing about life in the NICU,
because her twin was a one pound 10 ounce, one who spent a long time in the NICU. So lots of content for blogging and eventually decided I wanted to write a book for grieving mothers. So that’s how my publishing journey started. I figured it all out on myself. I did the things I needed to do fell in love with the process, started writing about parenting.
And I go authored a book called lose the Cape realities for busy, modern moms and strategies to survive. We should’ve gone with a shorter subtitle, but it was at that point really about the second book where people were like, what are you doing? How are you doing this? I want to write a book, tell me what to do. And so a business again,
I love that story. I’m sorry that it started out with so much pain and heartbreak. And I mean, you’re right though. I mean, those are some of the things that we just are so compelled to do. I think some of the best, most powerful companies are started with a deep rooted emotional story like that. And I agree now, writing is such a healing tool.
It can really be an excellent tool for helping people come through trauma, come through grief, come through just anything they’re going through. So that’s actually another Avenue that we really do is work with people on writing to heal because it was such a massive part of my process. Yeah. So give everybody kind of an overview on your company. So write, publish,
sell, and you have the women in publishing summit. So let’s go ahead and lay the foundation and then we’ll dive into what you’re going to train us on today. Great. So I started write, publish, sell as an opportunity to charge people for all the questions they were asking. Right. I started doing the things that were really hard for people to figure out,
like lay out an ebook conversion and how to find all the things that you need to write a book and all of that stuff. And through the process, I created a publishing imprint and created a publishing house. And then another one, and then another one, that’s a whole different story. But you know, I wanted to be a bigger part of the process than just helping someone lay out their book and help them load it to Amazon.
But actually what I found was that where I really enjoy working is not in the, I mean the publishing side. I’m glad I have that experience, but I liken the whole process of helping people figure out what the book is that they should write and why. And then kind of project managing it is really the best thing to get it through from there to publish.
And we work with authors who are self published, who are traditionally published and who are hybrid published as well, which is kind of a cross between the two. I love this process of helping people find the resources and figure out what to do and how to do it. And that’s how the women and publishing some, it was born because I really much like pod-casters,
I think we love showcasing resources and tools and people and putting them in front of the audience of people who need them. So we took that route to create this big basically like week of encouragement and support and educational resources and really a shout out to the women who are writing books, selling books, editing books, creating covers and layouts for books, the whole gamut,
because we just don’t get enough credit out there. It’s so exciting. That’s so exciting. That’s what, so we can just lay it out there, even though it’s going to be months after this particular show airs, but that’s going to be spring 2021, right. Is so women in publishing summit. Okay, great. We’ll make sure that you guys get information about that that’s coming up.
So this is actually a really good place to start. So let’s kind of start out with some basics here. What is the difference between self publishing and going to traditional route of having a publisher? And I understand that obviously it’s not, everybody can just go get a publisher there’s you have to have a certain audience and a platform. And so that’s really difficult,
but many people are self publishing. So talk to us About the difference. So it’s interesting because in the past, And in this time that I’ve been involved, Like we’ve seen self publishing explode. It started at about 2000. Well, it started a long time before that, but it didn’t really begin to be mainstream until about 2009, 10, 11,
12, with the addition of e-readers and Kindles. I mean, it’s hard to imagine what life was like, but it’s own. They’ve only been in our world for about 10 years and it made such a big difference. There are definite reasons why certain people would want to choose their traditional route other than the self publishing route. But for entrepreneurs, the self publishing route offers a really,
really great way forward because you have full control, you do it on your timeline, you make the decisions. So just to back up quickly, when you seek a traditional publishing arrangement, basically there are people who require that you go through an agent or through solicited manuscripts. And then there are a lot of smaller and midsized publisher that allow you to just go ahead and submit your idea for nonfiction,
which is where I would assume most entrepreneurs be. You have to draft a really detailed proposal. They want to know what other books are out there like it, how yours is different, what you can do with it. And I’ll, and it’s a great process for learning and understanding your book. But it’s a very, very timely process. Even if you’re not working through an agent,
even if you’re going directly to a publisher. And then when the book gets to the, or you don’t have to write the full book before you go traditional publishing, actually you just have to create that summary to send to them. And they decide yes or no. The advantages obviously of publishing is that you don’t have to figure out all the pieces of the puzzle.
You, somebody else is going to do it all for you, depending on the size of the publishing house, you may or may not get an advance. It surprises people to know that there are still people getting paid hundreds of thousands of dollars in advances, but those are usually like the Oprahs of the world and that Renee Brown’s a, you know, a hundreds of thousands to millions for somebody and in our sphere,
if you have a good book that the niche that they’re really wanting to fill and the ability to sell the book is a big, big factor. You may, you make it between a 10 and $50,000 advance. So for some people that’s a huge incentive, but for most entrepreneurs, self publishing professionally in a way that doesn’t look like you’ve just thrown it up on Kindle by yourself,
where you have a great cover design, you have great perfectly formatted interior design. You have a perfect cover. You’re following the industry standards. That’s a fantastic route because you can do it on your own time. You can choose what your cover looks like and work with the professionals to make it just right. You know, you generally have the audience already in place that you know is going to be interested in the book.
So definite pros and cons to both sides, but for a lot of entrepreneurs, I bet most of you are familiar with Pat Flynn. He’s self published his books. Um, there are a lot of entrepreneurs. If you were to start looking through Russell Brunson, the key is they’ve worked with professionals so that nobody can tell that their book is self published.
They created a publishing imprint, so that it doesn’t say published by Pat Flynn. It says published by whatever the name of the company is that he or the imprint that he created. So I assume the next question is How did you know? Yes. What is a publishing imprint? Yes. So this is awesome. So they publishers do it too. If you pay close attention to books,
sometimes you’ll see, I’ll make up a random name. Like I think Tarcher is an imprint of penguin, which is an imprint of random house, which is it’s like smaller delineations for the self publishing world. What the imprint means is that you’re creating a name associated to the books that are published. So when you go to Amazon or you go to books,
a million, or you go to wherever, it says published by Kat biggie press or purple butterfly press or Chrysalis press it. Doesn’t say published by Alexa, big Wharf. And you can create an LLC behind that. If you want to you, or it can be a DBA under your own business, some people will make it their company name. So you could have the Sweetlife publishing house or the Sweetlife press Sweetlife books.
People can copyright and trademark things obviously, but generally you can make it to be whatever you want it to be and associate it with your books. Just it’s another step to make you look just a little bit more professional, have a little logo, you know, all those kinds of things. Formation. I think when you dropped names like Pat Flynn and Russell Bronson,
and the fact that they self publish, I, a lot of people are like, wow, I really want to write a book, but I want to be taken seriously. And so when you drop names like you did, you know, some people didn’t know they self published because of that exact reason. And we do actually have our own, we have Sweetlife press.
So, so I have, I have written two books and self published, two books, and it was Sweetlife press in which we did that. And that’s exactly what we did. And so I do understand that process. One of the things that was really interesting as you were talking, I was remembering colleagues and friends and guests that I’ve had on the show.
And I still remember interviewing Denise Duffield Thomas and she was on the show, got a couple years ago and she had just released, I think it was chill preneur. And I remember one of the things we were talking about on that show was that they came back with her and they’re like, this is the cover of your book. And she’s like, why mrs.
Not what bit, you know? And she didn’t have a say, I mean, that’s the cover that the publisher chose for her book. And I still remember being in that interview and thinking, gosh, you know, I didn’t realize it would be that strict and they chose her cover and that was it. And she’s like, whatever I’m going with it.
I know it’s a great book, you know, but this is a cover. They chosen it. Isn’t what I had chosen. And so that’s a great example. And then also I still remember back. So I had a literary agent back in 2009 that approached me to write a book. I had little babies. I think my youngest was like two and a half years old.
And my oldest was only six. And he was so, so excited. It was such a great opportunity. And this agent was like, great, but the deadlines, I couldn’t meet the deadlines. There’s that too. And it was it. And it was exactly what you were saying. I was like, this could be a great opportunity, but I am in this business owner,
mom, life survival mode right now with these children. And there’s no way in hell. I’m getting you all of this by Friday. I mean, this is completely impossible for me. So I didn’t continue with that contract. I defaulted out of that contract. Um, and so as you’re, as you’re talking, I’m remembering kind of some of these things and saying,
okay, I get it. I get it. And just for our listeners, you know, it’s so interesting to again here, because you know, we’re always worried about our personal brand and what the perception is. And we’re going to dive here in a minute to the benefits of writing your own book, which is establishing you as an expert. So you don’t want to look like a cheapo because you’re publishing your own book,
right? You don’t want like, well, I couldn’t get a publisher, so I’m just going to put this out there and hope that people buy it. That’s not what we’re doing. That’s not what we’re talking about. So I love everything that you said. So my next question for you is when you self publish, where are your options to sell your book?
Okay. So you book anywhere these days. So it’s funny, the stigma behind, you know, the self publishing, like I remember years ago when I first was like, I’m going to self publish my book. Like the impression that a lot of my friends had was the first thing that came out of my girlfriend’s mouth was, Oh my gosh, please tell me it’s not going to be one of those horribly written books as 99 cents on Amazon.
But it’s growing beyond that. Like the industry around in the published books has grown so immensely that that’s really just the stigmatism that we carry, but that the rest of the world is moving beyond right now. So now I forgot what you asked me, but Oh, basically like where can you sell it so you can sell it on Amazon. But if I want my local bookstore to carry my book,
I can just Approach them just like a regular, why would any other retailer to sell my product and be like, here, here you go. You absolutely can. And in fact, that’s how most people, indie self published books are now showing up in Barnes and noble and target and all these places. It comes down to just like anything else, your ability to market yourself,
to know your target audience and how you approach them. So bookstores and libraries want to make money. If you know that your book is a good fit for the traffic, they get to their store. And even better, if you can bring something to the table, like I worked with one nonfiction author who approached the bookstore and she said, you know,
this is my book. I’d love to sell it here. But even better than that, it’s a natural book for a, she teaches a course from her book, right? So she was like, I’d also like to bring in my book club, my organization and these people in my workshop, basically, we’ll meet here once a month. And now it’s like,
wow, you’re bringing clients as well with a great love. That totally makes sense. But you have to have it positioned so that they can buy it. And that’s the thing that you can’t put it on Amazon and then go to a bookstore and say, will you please stop by book in your store? It doesn’t work that way. So those are the fine things that you have to learn about.
And those where the expert inside trading secrets When we work with you, I’d never would have even thought About that. Of course. Okay. So let’s talk about the benefits of writing a book. So what we’re talking about here, this isn’t a free book. This isn’t a freebie that you give away as a lead magnet. This is a book with your intellectual property,
your area of expertise, your methodology, your systems, your ideas, your direction, or, you know, precision about how to accomplish something. And it’s not this freebie that we’re talking about. So let’s dive into really, like you said, one of your areas of specialty and expertise is helping people figure out what the heck to write about how do you really guide people through making that decision in order so that it’s going to align with their business area of expertise,
or do you kind of have people that just start out as writers and the might not have a business yet? All of the above. It’s funny. It’s a wild world right now, as entrepreneurs, as writers as all of us, like the doors are wide open for us to create our own path, basically. So I have worked with authors who have come to me,
who have said, I’ll use my friend, Shelley, as an example, she was child has a food allergy. They also have a large family. And she has written a book about how to eat healthy on a budget. So dinner for a dollar is her thing. She wrote her book first and then she wanted to launch a business. So we had to,
you know, create the right path for that to happen. She came to me with her book already written. I helped her do the publishing and then launching and all of that kind of stuff. But then I’ve had other people who have come to me, you may be familiar with sparkle, hustle, grow Julie Ball, the founder of that subscription box for female entrepreneurs.
Like, I mean, No, I’m kidding. It’s created a wonderful product that people love, but now she’s growing her business beyond that. What can she do beyond subscription boxes? So she started a course, a boot camp for people who wanted to create subscription boxes and then a mastermind. So with her, when we were thinking about the right book for her,
it was how do I get something for that group of people who maybe aren’t ready for the course yet are still in that idea of, should I even create a subscription box and definitely aren’t ready for her mastermind yet so that she doesn’t have people joining her program, who aren’t ready for it, wind up asking a lot of questions because they’re very, very new and don’t know these things.
So her book, when we talk about the entryway to your big business funnel, it’s the perfect funnel because it’s a book about how to start a subscription box, what things you need to know, what her process was, what she went through. She uses a lot of examples from other box owners. And then at the end of it naturally, you’re like,
okay, if you’re ready to rock and roll, here’s your next step? Right? So she’s selling a book and she’s potentially growing her next level audience, hugely Perfect ideal audience. And it certainly can separate you and make you an expert in your space. I love that. That’s a perfect analogy as well, especially with the product funnel in that example.
So for people who are listening right now, they’re like, okay, I want to get started. I’ve been thinking about this for a long time. And I know you guys are listening out there and you’ve been thinking about doing this for a long time, because like 90% of the entrepreneurs and business owners I talk about have said, Oh, I really want to write a book.
I’ve been thinking about writing a book. So what are the steps to actually get started in this process for somebody who’s like, this is it, you know, 2020 is my year that I’m no longer going to drag my feet in this, but where on earth do I start? Okay. So to me, the starting places, always first and foremost,
identifying your goal of why you’re writing the book, what you’re trying to get to. And if you can identify that right away, like is it book sales because if selling books and getting on a best sellers list and getting interviewed on Oprah is your goal, then it’s a totally different path. If it’s to grow your funnel entryway into your business, if it’s to give a low cost.
So maybe you have a high end coaching program that lots of people can’t join, but they still want to know your knowledge then is it a solution for that level? Or is it, are you a newer business owner? And you’re really trying to establish your credibility to be known as the person on the street to come to talk to about these topics, to gain speaking engagements,
to be a step ahead of other people, applying for different opportunities, et cetera. So it can be a combination, but those are the general, like three different areas until you get to superstar status. And then it’s because people are telling you, you need to write a book, but for those of us who are not superstars yet, it’s generally one of those three areas.
So really having a clear understanding of that. Yeah. Let me just recap those so that people are really clear. So understanding obviously your why, so is it PR and you really want to be seen on Oprah, whatever that is. And so really making sure that media attention, I know that, and I do talk to a lot of business owners that are interested in that,
and that is obviously a really difficult path. And there are a lot of things that, that need to happen in order for that to happen, especially from an audience building standpoint, then as you certainly number one, number two, a product funnel. So as a product funneling into your other programs is a natural lead in and number three is just establishing your voice and growing your list as far as initially,
did I recap those correctly? Yes. And there are lots of in-betweens and you know, it’s funny because sometimes people will start thinking that they want to do one of those three things. And in the process they realize they have a personal story that they really want to share, and they can’t move beyond that until they write their personal story. It’s interesting.
Like once they get the idea started of, okay, I’m going to write a book, then they veer off in a different direction. You know, I’ve worked with authors who started have almost completely finished one book, and then they were like, I can’t move forward with that until I’ve addressed this issue. And then they wrote a book about how they overcame breast cancer and how other people can do that too.
And then came back to their business, this book. So, so cool. And not a surprise, not a surprise, you know, entrepreneurs we always want to create in creating is so healing. And I think for a lot of business owners, okay. So first figuring out step number one, figuring out what the purpose of what you’re doing is what’s next.
So for me, the next step is sitting down and figuring out the purpose of the book itself. Like, what is the reader going to get from it? Are you teaching them something? Are you sharing knowledge? You know, what are you doing? Are you doing it? How to book, are you doing a self help book? Are you doing a memoir figuring out that and creating an outline.
And this outline is a, sometimes a scary word for people, but it’s really just a, okay, I know I want to get the reader from a to Z and these are the things that have to happen between them and you jot them down in a list and that will help keep you on track and motivated to keep writing that book. So that’s step two.
Then step three is taking some time to either figure out all the steps in the process of publishing or determining. I just want to hire somebody to do all the steps of the publishing for me. And then you figure out who you want to work with basically, or you start researching how to do it yourself. Right? Name simultaneously. You’re writing your book.
Yeah. Okay. So let’s kind of talk about that for a minute. So for business owners that, you know, have a ton of things on their plate, how do you recommend people get the greatest productivity or focus? I know everybody’s different as far as writing, do you say, Hey, take a whole week and go on a retreat and rent a cabin in the woods and write your book,
or do you say, Hey, spend one day a week or three hours, or how do you usually actually recommend for people that are trying to balance all the things that, that they’re trying to balance and get their book? Really? I think the first thing to do is take an audit of what you’ve already created. And we do this through what I call my Quickstart program,
my QuickBook program, I’m actually working on the name of the system itself, but it’s, um, how to get what you already have available to you and start from there because the reality is most of us who are growing businesses have some level of team with us, right? So if you take that initial outline and you’re like, these are the things that I want to cover a next natural step is to pass it off to your VA and say,
go find everything that I’ve already created on this topic. Podcasts I’ve been on webinars, I’ve run all of that stuff and create that vault of information first. And then you can pick and pull things from that. It’ll also make it, if you work with a collaborative writer or someone who’s helping you get the book written that that’s an easy thing to hand off to somebody else.
But, you know, I think to be very honest, like this is where the overwhelmed just gets to them. Cause they’re like, Oh my gosh. Now I have to actually write a book and panic and breathing, you know, all of that, like, you’d be surprised how many people stop right there. They decide they’re going to write a book.
They know what the book is and then the brakes come on because it’s that next step that’s so overwhelming. But there are lots of ways to make it less overwhelming by starting with what you already have. You know, it’s so interesting as you’re going through this, this is our step by step process. Very similarly that we work with businesses to develop their signature programs and offers the outline,
assessing your assets. It’s the same exact process. And it’s true. You know, once they figure out what assets they already have that are going to accomplish a certain stage of that outline in this book, people just realize when they’re like, Oh my gosh, I have to actually go to work and do this. And you know, we have a lot of guys that listen to this show,
but working from home, which many people are and having the distractions, I think there is something super overwhelming about the ability to have an find uninterrupted time. And if, if like, if you’re like me, I have to get on a roll first. So for me to write, I actually have to be in the mood to write, I mean,
whether it’s music or working out first or lighting the dang candle or whatever it is, I have to be inspired to write. And I’ve ran into those problems before. And it’s actually even this way sometimes with recording this podcast where it’s like, if I’m not in the mood to create it, I’m just not creating it. So maybe if, you know,
if our listeners, if you guys are listening and you’ve been in this spot where you’re like, Oh my gosh, I have all this done. I want to keep writing my book. Maybe you’re like me and you’re super emotionally charged and you have to find the right environment or the right pre-activity to get your brain flowing. Because if somebody is like, okay,
well you have to sit down and write from 11 to one. You know what I’m not doing from 11 One writing and this just the way I personally am. Yeah. I completely agree with that. And that’s, that’s why I liked the idea of just sitting down and saying, well, one, you can always hire an accountability partner or a coach to like force you into one hour,
which is all it takes me is one hour to get somebody book out of them and sit down for one hour, go through all the steps that we just talked about and the preparation for it and have this skeleton, because it’s amazing the psychological difference that it makes. Once you have a list of topics just to start with, and then beyond that, you just start feeling.
It’s like, Oh yeah. I remember when I was interviewed on April beaches show, we talked about this, fill that in, in chapter six for that’s what I want to talk about, or you know, that type of thing, or you pick up your phone and you blocked somebody or however you communicate with your team. And you’re just like, here’s the brainstorm I have.
I know I want to include this information, this information, this information, go write it down on a list, go start, you know, filling in the gaps. It takes that overwhelm of sitting down and thinking, Oh my gosh, I have to spend these three hours just, you know, creating the best thing that ever happened. I’m sure.
You know what it’s like when you hire someone to write copy for you, whether it’s your newsletter or your sales page or anything like that, when you start from something that’s already existing, it’s so much easier to craft it and to recreate it, make it sound like you pull out the pieces you want than it is to start from scratch. Well, and that’s the power of working with somebody like you to do it.
So yes, if I had somebody like you to sit down with the deer, like, okay, April for the next hour, I’m going to pull, extract everything out of your brain. Then I would be there with bells on. And that’s exactly. I mean, that’s, that’s a difference. So those of our listeners that are really serious about doing this,
if you’ve been dragging your feet, It’s probably time to get somebody to guide you through this process. Like Alexa, When does the design come in? Is that usually something that takes really a while? Or do you write all the content first and then drop it into a design? How has that process fit into this? So our process and there’s, there’s lots of freelancers.
There’s lots of companies that help with this part of it. But what we do is we get the final edited version from the author when there’s no more changes. Obviously we do a proofread after that. So there may be small changes, but when the content is written, it’s been edited, it is done. Then we have a team of designers and we pick the right designer for the right project and we send it to them.
They do their designing skills because here’s the thing. I’m just going to be brutally honest here, because I can’t say this out loud to people, to their faces, but it breaks my heart when I go to a conference or an event and somebody’s speaking and I’m like, I have to get their book. And I go to the book table and I pick up their book and it’s not formatted properly.
And it looks a mess. And as a publisher, like I’m very in tune with what the industry standards are. So it annoys me probably more than the average person. I’ll, I’ll admit to that, but I can’t buy their book cause I can’t read it because that will drive me. So we have people who know, book, industry standards who know formatting,
who know how to do these different things. We send it to them. They do a couple of mockup chapters. We get back to the author, we say, does this look like what you were envisioning? Kind of like the same idea of designing a cover or graphics or anything like that. We come to an agreement and then we flow the entire book and then they get this beautiful lead designed and laid out book that then we can upload anywhere.
They want to publish their book. Fantastic. And it looks like the brand that they need to represent. And I think that that’s the concern that a lot of people have about self publishing is just really not knowing how to approach this and not knowing how to do this correctly in a way that is going to position them as a brand leader or as an expert or whatever their goal is for that book.
And I it’s the same thing. I mean, it’s like you, you love somebody and then you reach out and you go to their website and it’s not working or things are clicking, right. Or their logo sucks or, you know, whatever it is, it’s all part of the package. Right. And yet I think that another piece that people think is that it’s going to cost like thousands and thousands of dollars because you do see these programs that are like a $25,000 investment.
And I’m here to tell you that you can find people who will do it very professionally and very well, and you don’t have to mortgage your house to pay for the services. And it still looks really, really branded like you would want it to be. And that’s one of the things that we consider, like, are there fonts that you love? Is there a certain layout or things that you use in your things as business owners?
The branding is a huge part of what the cover and the interior looks like a hundred percent having an all uniform with that style guide across, well, this has been so helpful. I appreciate all of your information because you have given our listeners so many steps and so many different things to consider and there’s actions they can take at this point in time, or at least that they know that they can come back and tap into this episode again,
in the future when they are in fact, ready to go down this road, how can people get started? You have a quick start guide for our listeners. I want to make sure that everybody is getting their hands on also so that they can be in connection with you regarding your women in publishing summit and all of your services. Yeah, sure. So if you head over to write,
publish, sell.com, and if you go forward slash Quickstart, That’ll be kind of the freebie download on a recap on some of the things that we covered today, plus some additional resources on, on where to dig deeper, to find out more on those types of things. And then we also have write, publish, sell.com for jumpstart, which is our one hour workshop to help you outline your book.
So if you’re ready to go at that point in time, it’s a very small investment for that one hour to get that done. Wow. That sounds so awesome. That sounds incredible. I think everybody should join the workshop. I mean, one hour and, and see what you have after that and really getting inspired. I think that’s, that’s super great.
Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait to continue to connect with you offline, personally. I know that our companies are going to be connecting again in a lot of ways in 2021. And so I’m excited about that and where can everybody find you on Instagram or LinkedIn and really what’s the best social platform for people to connect with you?
We’re pretty active on, on Instagram with write, publish, sell, and with the women in publishing summit. And I also have my personal account there. Alexa, big Wharf. I’m Alexa, big work on Instagram and then pretty much write, publish, sell anywhere you want to go. You’ll find us awesome. Thank you so much for your time.
I appreciate you. This has been amazing. Thank you. You’re welcome. Thanks.<inaudible> All right, guys. Thanks so much for listening to this week’s podcast. Again, this is the sweet entrepreneurial podcast and all the show notes and resources we talk about as well as our business development programs and how you can find Alexa and get started with publishing can be found by visiting us online@sweetlifeco.com
and get the insider scoop on everything podcast and all of the amazing business bonuses that we give you by joining us in our business community. You can do so right now, by cruising over to sweet life, community.com and create your business profile to network with other companies actually get traction. You might even find some awesome clients in there and get direct business support from me.
Thanks so much for tuning in. I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 187: How to Build Your First Digital Marketing Funnel – with April Beach

187 SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Get Kajabi free for 14 days to generate perfect funnel pipelines with ease – www.aprilbeach.com/kajabi

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established small businesses who have a general understanding of marketing but want to tap into the power that building a digital marketing funnel can do for your business. Those in Phases 2-3 of my “Start to Scale System” formerly called Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap.

Summary:

You’ve heard that digital marketing is the way to grow your business but you aren’t sure where to start. Building your first digital marketing funnel is not hard as long as you understand the components of a funnel and how they work.
In this episode, April Beach dives into the 3 components of all winning funnels, how you use your marketing funnel and what you can expect if you’ve built it right. 
You’d be surprised by the number of large companies that do not currently know how to build and utilize a funnel and grass-roots relationship marketing. This episode will catapult you beyond big giants! 
Hiring a marketing firm may not yet be in your budget, or if you do plan to hire out you at least need to have an understanding of what a marketing funnel is, your company’s goals and expectations, and an overview of how your funnel should function and work.  This podcast episode gives you clarity to move forward. 

Highlights:

  1. Know what a marketing funnel is
  2. Know the components of a marketing funnel
  3. Understand how to set yours up

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLifeLaunch 90 Day Program is Open! Early fall registration starts now! Visit www.SweetLifeLaunch.com
Get Kajabi free for 14 days to generate perfect funnel pipelines with ease – www.aprilbeach.com/kajabi

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:
You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate Under the show. This is episode number 187, and you are listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And my name is April beach. Thanks for being here with me for yet. Again,
another episode today on the show, we’re talking about how to create your first digital marketing funnel, why it’s important and why as a business owner, whether you’re a brand new or you’ve been a business for a really long time, you have to start utilizing the power of building a digital marketing funnel and strategy. And it doesn’t matter if you are a teeny tiny business,
a mom and pop, even a large corporation, you need to be using these grassroots relationship building free. If you will type of marketing strategies to attract your perfect customers and your, your ideal audience. And as a matter of fact, the large companies are actually less utilizing these digital marketing funnels than small and midsize businesses. And they’re going to catch up sooner or later,
they’re going to have marketers come in there and say, Hey, let’s, you know, stop crushing everybody with these big ad campaigns and start building relationships with the audience. But you are going to be ahead of the game because you listen to this show and you will have already established awesome relationships with your audience and growing your list because you, especially at the end of this episode will know exactly how to build your first digital marketing funnel.
So this particular episode is, especially for you guys, you could be new, you could be established and you want to understand digital marketing. Now, again, it doesn’t matter what stage of business you’re in. Just in the last three weeks. I’ve had two different companies that have been in business for over 20 years. Join my business development mentorship program who have never had a digital marketing funnel ever before,
but they’re established companies. They do great. They’re making a lot of money. They’re ready to scale and grow. And it’s time to start kind of picking up the pace here at tapping into digital marketing. And they want to tap into that. So again, it doesn’t matter whether you’re new or you are like the best established expert in your space, whether you are a small business,
a midsize business, or even a large company, this episode is for you. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know what a marketing funnel is. You’re going to know the components of a marketing funnel, and you’re going to understand how to set yours up. So I don’t care if you hire this out or you keep this in house.
I’m a big advocate that even the things you hire out, you have to understand the end result and how they generally should be done yourself before you can hire that position or that task out to somebody else. So you’re going to understand this here on the show. And here’s some statistics why a healthy and thriving marketing funnels are essential for your business. This comes from small business genius.net.
So first of all, 82% of customers feel more positive about a brand after reading your customized content. So they like you better when they read customized content that comes from you in 53% of businesses rely on creating customized content as part of their brand strategy. So it leaves us with two questions. Number one, how do you get the chance to get in front of your ideal audience and even share customized content and number two,
how do you get people to pay attention so that they can absorb your customized content and buy from you? And the answer to both of those questions is we build you a really awesome, but simple doesn’t have to be elaborate digital marketing funnel that generates the leads of your ideal audience that will become your ideal customers. And so that’s what we are diving into in today’s show.
All of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight, seven. There’s going to be a lot of links in here and different bonuses. We always love to give you guys bonuses with our podcast episodes to make sure you’re cruising over to Sweetlife podcasts.com to get those. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into building that component of your marketing funnel.<inaudible> Okay.
So let’s start out with the basics here. A marketing funnels, a series of online pages and actions that bring new users into your site so that you can capture their information and build a relationship with them for future sales. Should I say that again? I’ll say it one more time to be safe. If you’re like me, you’re probably driving your car and half listening because we’re also busy.
So let me just say it again for you. A marketing funnel is a series of online pages and actions, and I’ll explain what that means that bring new users into your site so that you can capture their information and have a chance to build a relationship with them so you can sell to them. So a sales funnel is this same type of structure, but when you’re sending somebody just to buy directly today,
we’re talking about building your first marketing funnel to generate leads as opposed to direct sales. And here are the steps to do that. Step. Number one, to build your first digital marketing funnel is to decide what you’ll give away for free to attract people, to give you their information. This is also called freemium business model, as a matter of fact,
that the recording of this tomorrow morning, and I’m speaking on a Kansas city business leaders summit and teaching how to use this business model. I mean, this is how companies aren’t even tapping into this very much yet. You guys it’s so important in my talk tomorrow, they’ve asked me to speak on the quote unquote freemium business model. So this is what we’re talking about here.
If that’s the terminology you’re familiar with, I call it a lead magnet because it magnetizes people to give you their information so you can generate the lead either way. Step one is to decide what your company is going to give away for free in exchange for a lead’s name and email address. And here’s some things I want you to know about this are very important because this has changed over the last couple of years,
your free thing you give away your freebie, a lead magnet should be of high value and low time. So we used to give away these things that, you know, could be 20 page white papers, or, you know, numerous different things that would give so much information. People don’t have time anymore. So we want to give somebody something of high value and low time.
This freebie should solve a problem for your ideal audience. And the freebie you’d give away should be a natural lead to help people decide if they need and want to buy your products or work with you, or be more involved with your services. So once you decide what this thing is, you need to give away for free, go ahead and create it.
Just start working on this first. This takes businesses a lot longer than they expect. I’ll be honest with you. So decide and determine what is that high value, low time free thing you’re going to give away. And again, you’re invited to join my free online business owners community. And in there is a course. It’s a video where I give you a ton of different ideas on what these free things can be from videos to quizzes,
to assessments, to, you know, we talk about even the basics of PDFs. So cruise over to sweet life, community.com and you’re welcome to join in there and access that training for free. So step number one is deciding what you’re going to give away in order to have it be of high value to generate the lead seven. Number two is actually building the landing page where you’re going to place the form for people to fill out,
to get your free thing. So you need, or the person on your team that does your pages needs to build a separate standalone landing page. The page needs to have a form in it, and it needs to be really basic. It doesn’t have to be elaborate. This isn’t a long sales page where you’re inviting somebody to join your $20,000 a year mastermind.
This is one page with a form on it for them to fill out, to get your really cool free thing. So keep it basic. And the purpose of this page is to only do one thing and that’s for people to fill out the form. So because of this, the page doesn’t have navigation on it. The page usually doesn’t have social media icons on it.
It is super simple. It’s literally a standalone page that doesn’t have anything else that any action can be taken on that page, except for filling out your form to get the free thing you promised. And then of course, make sure that you have great copywriting on there. That’s direct to the point about what they’re going to get, what are the benefits of sharing their information and what will they receive?
What’s your promise to them that they’re going to receive after they share their contact information with you? And so here’s just a pro tip when it comes to building landing pages, build this page on your own website, if at all possible. I know there are a lot of great services out there like lead pages and splash pages and all these other things whose purpose is to just be the house of these funnels,
just the lead page and the process of this funnel we’re talking about. But gold standard is to build this as a page within your own website. So your website generates the traffic. We want to keep them on your website. That is our best practice. Okay. It doesn’t mean those services. Aren’t good. They just, aren’t what I would call best practice in.
Step. Number three is to then build a thank you page. So after somebody is on the landing page and they fill out the form to get your cool free thing, the very next place they’re going to go to as a thank you page, the thank you page is the most missed opportunity in all marketing funnels. You know, you’ve filled out something before and you’ve gotten some for free and it’s just like this one white page pops up says,
thank you. Your information has been submitted. You know, click here to go back. That is a waste of somebody’s attention. They’ve just trusted you. They’ve given you their information. You need to build a thank you page. And on that, thank you page. You can have an intro video to who you are or who your company is. You can share the most important things you want.
These new leads to understand about your company. You can even have an immediate call to action there for people to buy from you or sign up for your service for schedule a complimentary consultation. There are so many things you can do and you need to do with the thank you page that companies are missing the boat on. So first we have the landing page with a form.
The next page you’re going to build as a thank you page and the people, once they fill out their form, they’re going to be redirected to this. Thank you page. It’s an awesome place for you to build a relationship and confirm to them. Hey, you did a really good job by giving us your name and email. And we don’t take that for granted because you and I both know the number of companies that take our names and email addresses for granted.
And immediately we unsubscribed from them. As soon as we get that first email, that’s where like, Oh, I was weak. I gave them my email, you know, something, something triggered me, but I wish I didn’t. You don’t want people doing that to you. So utilize a thank you page to actually say, Hey, thank you so much,
made a great decision. We’re not going to let you down. Thanks for being here in the meantime. You’re probably wondering, well, where the heck is a free thing, right? In the meantime in cyberspace, your free lead magnet asset that you created is being delivered to them in their email box. And here are a couple of reasons why we want it to send.
We want to send it to their email address. Number one, your email will probably show up in what’s called the promo or the social media folder in somebody’s Gmail inbox. We want your email to end up in a primary folder. We want to do what’s called white list, your email address. And so we need somebody to click on it so that your email service provider realizes that you do in fact,
want that email. And it will make sure that it’s showing that person emails that come from your business. Otherwise, if we give them the free thing immediately. So if we were to go from the landing page to immediately be directed to the digital delivery, whether it’s an ebook or a video series or whatever free thing you’ve given them, they never have to go check their inbox.
And what happens is the next time you send them an email, they could totally miss it cause they aren’t looking for it. So best practice is to have them go check their email to then either click on or download or access the free thing that you have given them. Okay. Now let’s kind of talk about this a little bit in a recap and high level.
So the recap overview of your very first marketing funnel, your funnel contains number one, a landing page where people fill out a form to get your freebie. Number two, a thank you page where they can buy a map by now see more of who you are, understand you become more familiar with your brand and it includes your lead magnet being sent to them by email,
of course it includes the asset itself. So the free thing, whether again, that’s a PDF or a video series or quiz or whatever it is that you’re giving away for free. So you have to build the asset first. That was the first thing we talked about. It’s important to build the free thing you’re giving away. So you know, the correct copywriting for it.
And you know how to set that up on the landing page and communicate the end result they’re going to receive from the asset you’re delivering. And then you build your landing page, your thank you page and you connect your email marketing manager to deliver the asset automatically to their inbox within the first three minutes. So here’s some tech protests. So many people have tech questions.
My company has a division where we build parts of websites and funnels because this is like the number one thing that holds businesses up. So let me kind of pour into you a little bit here regarding some tech pro tips. Number one, like we talked about, try to build your landing page and your own website to generate S E O if you don’t know what SEO is,
it’s search engine optimization. That basically means that the more people are clicking on your website, the more Google is going to show your website to other people because they realize people like it really important. Number two, be sure to have your Facebook pixel installed in your website. Now we have Sarah tomes who is our Facebook and Instagram marketing expert. She’s on the show all the time.
So you can cruise back to our website@sweetlifepodcast.com and just simply search the word Facebook. And we have hosted shows in the past that teach you how to install your Facebook pixel on your website and all the things that are important about a Facebook pixel. But I wanted to make sure I’m mentioning it here and not leaving you hanging. We do have other episodes to speak directly towards Facebook pixel.
Please go back to the website, search the episodes because all the business trainings that other companies charge thousands for are literally sitting there like a gold mine in our past episodes. So I want to make sure you guys are using them. And then the last tech pro tip is that we really love Kajabi. I talk about Kajabi all the time on the show.
We interviewed the Kajabi founders three years ago on the show. We use Kajabi within our own marketing and funnel building systems. And we build Kajabi websites for clients. And the reason why we’ve done this, and I’ve been in business for 24 years and moving from all these other types of website platforms is because nothing builds a marketing pipeline with funnel blueprints that we have seen faster than Kajabi.
So we are partners, we’re affiliate partners with them and we share their information all the time on the show, not just because we know they’re going to help their business, but because we do use them for everything, all of our online courses, and even for websites and clients that don’t even have online courses, they have amazing front of the house website development.
So you can cruise over any time and start a free Kajabi trial by going to April beach.com forward slash Kajabi. That’s K a J a B I. So if you’re wondering, how do I do all these pages? And I don’t have the money to hire it out, I have to do it all myself. Do yourself a favor, just go practice and get a Kajabi trial.
I guarantee you, it will save you up to a year in time of online business development, sewing together, all these different other social media platforms. So that’s our show for today. Today, we talked about how to build your first digital marketing funnel. You heard what a digital marketing funnel is, how it’s used. Again, we’re not talking about a sales funnel because we’re not taking anybody’s money.
Instead in a digital marketing and funnel, you’re taking their name and email address for the opportunity, frankly, for the privilege of being able to email them, send them information and continue to connect with them, to build a relationship with them, to increase your company’s sales. It is a privilege as a business owner to have somebody share their contact information with you.
And we do that by creating a strategic digital marketing funnel that you can utilize in your business right now. I don’t care if you’re a large corporation. I don’t care if you’re a micro business, like my company with seven people in it, or if you’re a small business, you have up to a hundred employees, many companies are not utilizing this. This is the way to build authentic relationships with an audience so that you can continue to sell services.
And so in today’s show, you understand, and you talked about what a marketing funnel is, the components of a marketing funnel and how to set yours up. I hope you found this show incredibly informative. We have so many different resources for you, and I want to make sure that I’m sharing them with you again, that Kajabi free trial. You can tap into that any time as well as our community.
If you’d like to join the expert classes totally free, that teach you how to create your first asset to give away for free and the steps of setting up your first list, building marketing funnel, and you can find all of those links simply by going to Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 87. You’ll have to get the recap of the show, Angela, get the links to join us in the community and to set up the free Kajabi trial.
All right, you guys, next week, I am so excited because we have Alexa big war on here, and we are diving into how to publish your book to make sure that you are established as a leader in your space. It’s an awesome show. There’s so much information. So if you haven’t yet subscribed to the show, please click subscribe on your favorite podcast.
Listening software. We’re on Pandora now, of course on Spotify. And of course, for grateful to be a leading business podcast on Apple podcasts as well for over three and a half years. Thank you so much for tuning in and sharing this episode with your friends. And I will talk to you.

Episode 186: How To Survive A Facebook or Instagram Hack On Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Follow us at @sweetlifepodcast on Instagram! 
 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Every business who operates on Facebook and Instagram.

Summary:

“It will never happen to me” 
 
Famous last words until you wake up and your Facebook and Instagram business accounts are gone. 
 
As a business owner, you likely spend a lot of time and resources on Facebook or Instagram. You post, go live, comment with others, research hashtags, produce IGTV videos and spend too many hours filtering your photos. But these necessary evils are a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure. Right up to the moment they’re wiped out – with no communication or consent from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket, no one to talk to for help. 
 
This is what happened to April Beach and The SweetLife Company, and in this show, you’ll learn all of the things no one tells you to do to save your company, keep your followers and survive being wiped from the Facebook and Instagram planet. 
 
This is not an episode about internet security. This is an episode about business survival. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to protect and preserve your content
  2. How to control the out of control
  3. How your company can bounce back after the hack

Resources Mentioned:

To regain control of your Facebook page you can start by claiming it was been hacked through this link
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. Thanks for tuning in here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And today’s episode, I’m downloading those of you who have been asking and asking about what actually happened to our business,
Facebook and Instagram accounts. Many of you follow me or followed me on social media. And you knew that we literally got wiped off the face of the earth. Like we’ve never existed after, well, over a decade of being on Facebook and years and years being on Instagram. And so in this episode, I’m going to share exactly what happened and how to survive a Facebook or Instagram hack on your business.
Now, first things first, this is not an internet security episode. I’m not an internet security expert. I’m actually going to share the things that you can’t Google, that nobody tells you and share the insider things that we learned. Honestly, the hard lessons, some of them we did well, some of them we failed on so that if this ever happens to you,
that you know how to survive it. And also you are going to walk away with four things that I recommend you do immediately right now, because the statement that it will never happen to me is totally not true. I’m so sorry. Especially as we move towards an election, there’s always an increase in internet hackers. And I don’t know about you, but there’s just been so many instances with other businesses that I have heard about in the last six months with COVID and way too many bad people with way too much time on their hands hacking business accounts.
So I know it isn’t just me and I don’t want it to be you. So this episode is for every business who operates on Facebook and on Instagram, because those famous last words, it will never happen to me are only said up until the point that you wake up, like I did, and your accounts are totally gone. Not only that you’re going to hear what happened to my hardware.
I’m just going to honestly download the whole story for you. It is a nightmare, but it’s an eyes wide open thing. And I think that other businesses should know what can happen. I wish somebody had really laid it out there for me, like I’m going to do for you. So, you know, I understand that as a business owner, you spend a lot of time on these resources on Facebook and Instagram.
You post things, you go live, you hunt for the best imagery and source, the best pictures. You comment with others, you research hashtags, you produce IgE TV videos, and you probably have spent way many hours figuring out what filter is the right one to go with your brand or you’ve paid somebody else to do that. So you’ve invested time and you’ve invested money in growing your Facebook and Instagram presence as you should.
I mean, these are necessary evils, and they’re a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure and establish your expertise as a business right up until the moment when they’re wiped out. And this usually happens with zero communication from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket or reclaim your account. And frankly, nobody is going to talk to you.
It Facebook, we all know that that nobody cares about you or me enough to get on the phone. They really could give a shit about your brand and your business. And it doesn’t even matter how much money you have spent like us over the years in Facebook ads, because they have enough money. They’ll be just fine without yours. You mean nothing to them.
And if somebody takes offense to that listening, great, maybe Facebook will call me now, anyway, in this episode, I’m going to share with you exactly what happened to our company, the steps that we had to go through to regain access. And frankly, what happens when you have to start your whole entire brand and your Facebook account from scratch it.
The recording of this episode, I think that I have a whole 56 followers on my brand new Instagram account, because that’s the way the ball bounces, by the way you can cruise over and follow me at, at April beach life. I would love it if you’d follow me, but that’s the way it is right now. So let’s go ahead and dive into this show at the end of the show,
you’re going to know how to protect and preserve your content, how to control what is absolutely out of control through settings in your Facebook business page manager and how your company can bounce back after you are hacked in many of the resources will all be found that I’m sharing on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. Okay. Let’s dive in.<inaudible> Okay.
So let me give you a rundown, just kind of a timeline leading up to this episode. Last November, we had some Facebook hacking instances where it says somebody’s unauthorized logged into our account, and of course we’ve done everything religiously that Facebook has said, the two factor authentication, the separate authentication app. I even have lists of reclaim codes written down by hand in my desk drawer,
everything you can possibly do, according to what Facebook tells you to do, to keep your account secure. We have done them to the hilt. And even with that, we had a hacking instance that lasted eight weeks between November and December last year, where we were unable to comment on our own posts. So if somebody commented to us, we couldn’t comment back.
And we had 11 different times where we were locked out of making any comments to our followers, or really connecting with our followers over a period of 24 hours. So these 11, 24 hour periods lasted over over a term of two months. That was the worst thing in the world to me. And I felt terrible because people that are used to connecting with us and just chatting back and forth,
they couldn’t hear anything from us and they didn’t know why. And so I thought that was like the end of the world. Well little did I know with the rest of the joy that 2020 has brought us, it has only gotten worse in may of 2020. Our Facebook ads account was hacked. And within a period of a couple of hours, somebody had actually started running ads for,
I believe it was a solar panel company and they look totally legit on our ads manager account. And I don’t even know who is getting the money for this. Cause I was paying Facebook. I was getting charged like $1,700 over a period of a couple of hours for running what looked like solar panel ads. Again, the logic behind that the money was going to Facebook.
So nobody was actually making money. It just sounds like a cruel and unusual punishment thing to do to a business owner with somebody that had way too much time on their hands. And so that happened in may and we had open tickets, unfortunately because of that, our entire ads manager count was shut down. Facebook deemed that even after all of the years of all of the ad spend basically all the money that we had paid them to run ads for years and years,
being a faithful business customer that they didn’t want to deal with having to clean out our account from hackers. And so they totally shut down our Facebook business ads account. And if you’re in digital marketing, you know, that means that we also lost all of our pixel traction. So that means all of our pixels, all of the data, all of the tracking that we had done in all of our website pages for all of the people who’ve responded to our ads,
our ability to rerun and retarget ads to our warm audience, everything was lost and wiped out. And that was in may of 2020. I also thought that was by far the worst thing on earth that could happen. And we created new pixels starting from scratch. Then on June 12th at 3:42 AM an email came to my phone that our account had been breached with an authorized access.
And I woke up that morning to no personal Facebook page and no personal Instagram account and no business Facebook page for my other company. So all of the accounts that were connected to one email address worked totally wiped off the pace of the planet. It wasn’t like there were shut down and had to reset the password. They were gone completely wiped off the face of the earth.
And so I, like I had learned to do unfortunately so many times before reached out to Facebook and because I technically in their eyes had to zero Facebook account, like I had never existed. Couldn’t even open a Facebook support ticket. So being the crafty person that I was trying to be and desperately figure out how to regain control of my business and personal Facebook accounts,
I was emailing back to Facebook through my other email address, to the open support ticket that was still open regarding the shutdown of my ads account. Previously. I had somebody I’m so excited. I had somebody I could email. Well, I very soon learned that this person also did not give a shit about me. And because what I was emailing about had nothing to do with actually the first ticket number with shutting down the ads account that this person was not willing to help me and that I needed to open a new support ticket.
Well, unfortunately, Facebook. So you think it’s bad already. Facebook blocked all of our devices. Okay. So in their desire to protect themself, I’m giving them the benefit of the doubt. They blocked somehow some way my cell phone, my brand new iPhone 11, not a cheap phone and even online, I could not access the accounts. I tried to get the text number to be sent to me.
It was gone. You guys, not even like let’s reclaim and refresh this account totally gone. And just like taking a minute here and sharing this story with you. At this point, I was not thinking about my business. I was thinking about the comments that my dad had made to me on my personal Facebook page and commenting on his grandkids stuff. And my dad died four years ago and loving going back and reading his comments on my Facebook page.
I was thinking about the morning things that I get to wake up to of your memories from eight years ago, when my kids were babies and playing with bubbles in the backyard, or sitting in the couch, watching Mickey mouse with an umbrella over their head, those are the things that I lost. And so just separating this a minute here, we’re going to talk about the business loss,
but the magnitude of the devastation of memories that were totally wiped off the face of the earth and Facebook could care less has been absolutely just a tragedy for me personally, as a daughter, as a mother. And so picked up my big girl, britches got back to work, and I will tell you that was June 11th. We did not that regain access to Instagram because they also shut down the Instagram account.
Not only the Instagram account, I couldn’t even log into our other Instagram accounts from my mobile phone. We did not regain access to that until last night. And the recording of this, that was July 22nd, it’s 7:16 PM. So if you’re following along with this terrible nightmare, what I’m sharing is that somehow some way Facebook blocked my cell phone and I couldn’t even log into my other Instagram accounts.
I tried a VPN. I spent four hours on the phone with Apple. I spent two hours in the Apple store, which was a miracle because with Kobe, they’re only supposed to give me 15 minutes. I have, I spent massive time trying to at least control our other Instagram accounts. For example, this podcast account at Sweetlife podcast, couldn’t even log into this count online.
And somehow some way it was told to me that Facebook had blew the serial number on the motherboard of my iPhone somehow some way. And I had to bite the bullet and buy a new iPhone. So it has clearly been a nightmare and all of our communities we’re on Facebook, everything. So I’m recording this episode for you to give you four different ways that you can not only safeguard your account,
but four different ways that you can bounce back. Like we are after it happens, because no matter what, it will be a total nightmare for you. However, there are some strategic things you need to be doing in your business in order to protect yourself, both on the personal side and on the business side. So I’m going to share these four safeguards for you.
And then I have resources for you in the show notes. So safeguard number one, we have talked about this on the show before you need to make sure that your email list, your list of leads and clients and content does not solely live on Facebook or Instagram or any other social media platform for that matter. So that means you need to grow your email list.
Don’t allow Facebook and Instagram to completely control your ability to communicate with your followers. So you need to be getting the names and email addresses of your followers. At this point in time, you don’t even have to think of anything crafty. You can put a post out there and saying, Hey, I heard Facebook and Instagram accounts are getting hacked all the time.
And I don’t want to lose contact with you guys. If you want to be put on our emergency email list, sign up here. I wish I had done that. I should have done that. Knowing how many times we had been getting hacked, although I never dreamed that that would happen and we’d clearly lose everything. So safeguard number one is to build your email list in a separate email marketing manager that you own so that you never lose connection.
So if you have to start from scratch with your accounts, like we have to do, you can email your list and say, Hey, follow us at our new account. Safeguard. Number two, on your Facebook business page, you should have multiple administrators. I did have multiple administrators on my Facebook ads account. Those people that ran our Facebook ads for us,
but we only had one primary administrator on my Facebook business page. Therefore, if you go to Facebook right now in search April beach, you will see my page and I have no control over it. There’s my face. There’s our logo. Nothing. It’s just going to live there forever. And when you see me not posting again, it isn’t because I suck at creating content.
It’s because we have no control over that. So on your Facebook business page, make sure that you have multiple administrators. So if you have an assistant, you have somebody that works with you. I don’t care if you have a friend, make them an administrator on your Facebook business page and make sure this person doesn’t share the same IP addresses you. So they’re not within your own home.
So if your wifi gets hacked, both of you guys, aren’t totally locked out, safe guard. Number three, this is kind of a crafty one. We have this, and I’m really grateful. This is a great reason to have a custom hashtag for your business. So we have a custom hashtag two of them. Actually, one of them is sweet life podcast.
So anytime somebody is looking for one of our episodes, whether it’s on Instagram or on LinkedIn, they follow our hashtag, which is sweet life podcast. And all of our stuff pops up. So because we have a custom hashtag, even with our new Instagram account, I can keep reposting to that same hashtag in our followers that know like, and trust that we’re going to keep giving content can keep getting content from us and they can see the connections to our new account.
So this is a great reason why you should have a custom hashtag that is only your company’s hashtag, then nobody else can take from you. And it doesn’t matter what account you’re posting from. It’s your hashtag. And you can even go back in paying and reconnect with those followers that are following your hashtag, as they’ve commented on it in the past. Now,
if you lose your account, like we did, all of your posts are actually going to be gone. But as you go back and you post more content with that, hashtag people that follow that hashtag are going to see it and then safe card, number four, this is going to take you a little bit of time. Everything else you can do.
Yeah. This is gonna take you a bit of time. Should have this done. Anyway, you need to have this to grow and scale your company to multiple six to seven figures. This is one of those standard operating procedures that you should have rolling anyway. Okay. This is cute. Seeing your content clearly and cleanly organized somewhere else. So everything you post on your social media platforms should also live in a Google drive or in a Dropbox.
We keep everything in Dropbox. So all of the content that we post for every single podcast episode and all the content, right, that I have posted in the past on my Instagram account, that is no longer alive. We have any different account other than that platform. So rather than recreating all the content from scratch, we get to simply go and copy and paste.
A lot of that content, obviously there’ll need to be some editing and updating to what’s pertinent and to make sure it’s relevant right now, but we have that content did live somewhere else. And so if you don’t have a system yet for organizing and archiving your content, you need to have one. It’s also a great way to realize what you’ve created as a business owner and stop always creating new things.
You can start repurposing some of the content that you might’ve posted two years ago, especially if it is still relevant and pertinent, you don’t always have to start from scratch. As a matter of fact, that is not a good idea to always start from scratch. And so those are your safeguard tips and you know, some of these things we did really well.
Again, we have a separate email list. That’s something that we teach you guys about all the time here on this show. I did not have multiple admins on my business page that I lost that was shut down. And I did not have multiple admins on my April beach business page. I went wrong there. I had multiple admins on my business ads account,
but not on the business account. Safeguard number three is having a custom hashtag and you guys can follow us at our custom hashtag at Sweetlife podcasts. We would love it if you did. Now, we’re literally starting from scratch and you’ll go over and you’ll follow us on our podcast account on Instagram. And it’s like, there’s 200 followers and I would love it.
If you’d follow us over there. The hashtag for that is sweet life podcast. You need to have your own custom hashtag, so you can always reclaim and connect and talk directly to your audience. And then safeguard number four is to keep your content cleanly organized and archived someplace else. So you are not totally relying on social media platforms to how is your content?
Another thing that you can use is you can use a social media scheduler like we do. We really love buffer. I know their strep, sprout, social and different social media schedulers. You can go back and see what’s already been posted and copy and pasted out of there, but that’s again, relying on another social platform in a sense. So the safest place for it is going to be in a Dropbox business account or something like that.
So thank you so much for listening to this episode. I hope you guys found this informative. The purpose of this show is to set you up for success in the event of failure. And I don’t want anybody to have to go what we went through since this happened. We now have a new business community. If you haven’t joined us yet, we have created a new custom business networking app,
and we’ve built that completely on a brand new app platform that is exclusive to us called mighty hosts. We love them. We’re very happy and you can join our new business community. So Facebook community is gone. New business community app is here by visiting Sweetlife community.com. We’d love to have you joined us over there and I’m always delivering face to face. As far as virtually goes,
business development strategies, and you get tons of business training and coaching, and you can network with other companies and grow your own business there too. So join us over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all the show notes. And the resources we talked about here will be found in the show notes by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. This was how to survive Facebook or Instagram hack on your business and start from scratch without totally starting from scratch.
Again. I really hope it doesn’t happen to you, but if it does, I hope this episode has caught you first and you don’t have to live through the nightmare that I did, right? You guys, I hope you have a great week next week. We’re diving into all about how to build your first funnel and dive into using digital marketing to grow.
I’ll talk to you again soon. Bye for now.

Episode 185: What Is A Landing Page and Why Do You Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020)  Last call to get Free for life! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Businesses who want to grow your list and increase leads using digital marketing. 

Summary:

In this show we’re diving into digital marketing with landing pages including the difference between a landing page and other pages on your website, what should be on a landing page to increase conversions, and why every company should have a landing page they know works! 
 
A landing page is a standalone web page, created specifically for a digital marketing campaign. It’s where a visitor “lands” after they click on a link in an email, or ads from Google, Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, or where you market online. 

Highlights:

  1. The difference between a home page and a landing page
  2. How to use landing pages in your marketing 
  3. The anatomy of what to include in your landing page

Resources Mentioned:

For easy landing pages, built-in email marketing, and custom websites – TRY KAJABI FREE for 28 Days


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 185 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. We’re diving in more to digital marketing, and we talk about digital marketing a lot here on the show.
It’s one of our primary topics because it’s one of the most important strategies that small businesses and solo entrepreneurs need to know to leverage and use to grow your company. And so obviously it’s a hot topic and there’s so much, that’s always changing in digital marketing that many times on this show, we dive into a lot of advanced digital marketing strategies, but one of the most important things is coming back to the basics.
In some of these basics are the most common questions that we get when clients come to us, when they want to work with our company in order to grow their list, it’s really back to the nuts and bolts of what is a landing page and why do you need one? And so I thought it was time to do another podcast episode back to some digital marketing,
digital strategies and basics that every single company needs. And so all the show notes and everything I’m going to talk about detail here in this episode can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. This is episode number 185 here on the show. And we thank you guys so much for being faithful listeners and sharing this show with your friends. Now,
this is who this particular episode is for. This is for you. If you want to grow your list of leads, you’re either a new business or an established business. And here’s what you can expect in this show. We’re diving into the digital marketing and landing page basics, including the difference between a landing page and other pages on your website. What should be on your landing page to increase conversions.
I’m actually going to break down the anatomy of a landing page for you and why every company should have a landing page that, you know, works. This is again, if you are a new startup one man show, or if you have 25, 30, 50 hundreds of employees, you need to have a landing page that, you know, works.
Now a landing page is a standalone webpage, but we’re talking about the differences and the power of landing pages in today’s episode. And at the end of this show, you’re going to know the difference between a homepage and a landing page, how to use a landing page in your marketing and the anatomy of exactly what to include on your landing page to increase your sales conversions.
And so excited to share this show with you today. And as a bonus, if you haven’t yet cruise over, join us in our new sweet life entrepreneur in business, online community app. This is a last chance for you to join that app and have a free for life membership. It’s actually our brand new customized community we’ve built. We ditched Facebook groups and I could not be happier to be honest.
And so cruise over and join us totally for free and dive in. We do a lot of personal coaching in that app, and it’s a great place for you to network and grow your business. You can join us for free over there by visiting sweet life, community.com and register. Join us for free for life. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training podcast.<inaudible> Okay.
On today’s show, we’re talking about what is a landing page and why do you need one? So a landing page, again, is a standalone webpage created specifically for a digital marketing campaign. It’s where your visitor lands. After they click on an email you’ve sent out or an ad that you may have run maybe from Facebook ads, Instagram, LinkedIn, or just Google ad words.
And it’s a landing page that has only one job. The job of this page is to increase the rate of conversions from a prospect to an actual lead on your website so that you can market to them after that. So the whole entire purpose of a landing page is to collect someone’s contact information. And so I’m going to dive into today exactly how to do this and build this page to magically,
make this happen. So inside this show, we’re going to dive into all these digital marketing tactics that a lot of digital marketers know, but you don’t have to be a marketing expert to know this. As a matter of fact, as a business owner, it’s your job to know digital marketing basics like this, and then you can delegate it to somebody that totally loves to do this stuff,
which frankly I don’t. And I know you probably don’t either, but many businesses, when you start up, you got to do this on your own. And so I’m going to make sure you have the tools here in this show so that you can build successful landing pages that convert. So we’re going to dive in and break this up into three parts today.
We’re going to talk in part one, I’m going to break down the difference between a homepage and a landing page. In part two, I’m going to share how to use a landing page in your marketing. And in part three, I’m going to share with you the anatomy of what should be on your landing page. And then I’m also going to share some insider secrets about some really cool things about landing pages too,
that are going to be really helpful for you to know, and is an added bonus to this show. We love Kajabi. We use Kajabi for landing pages, so you can actually create a 28 day free Kajabi trial just by cruising over to April beach.com forward slash Kajabi at any time when you’re listening to this and sign up for a free 28 day trial with them so that you can build really super easy landing pages,
but let’s go ahead and dive in here to the actual strategy of doing it. All right. Cool. Okay. So part one, the difference between a homepage and a landing page. So typical web pages on your site, they have a lot of goals. There’s a lot of things to do. When somebody lands on your actual website and your website is going to tell them a story,
it’s going to introduce them to your company. It could give a list of your services. When somebody lands on a regular webpage, they’re going to see a bunch of other things going on your navigation, your foot or menu. So all the way across the top, the pages on your website, which are typically your homepage about your company, you might have a blog or articles.
You might have a services page and a contact page. People are going to see all these different things to do on your actual website page. And they expect that. And the reason why a landing page is different is because a landing page is designed with one goal in mind. And that goal is to convert prospects into leads. So when somebody lands on a regular webpage,
it can be slightly overwhelming, which we’ve recorded many podcast episodes here on the show. You can search it in our website about actually how to build high converting website pages, but there’s still many options with a landing page. It only has one goal. And that one job of that landing page is to convert prospects into leads. And so we do this on a landing page by giving them only one thing they can do a landing page,
doesn’t have a menu, it doesn’t have the footer menu. It doesn’t have all these cool different places. They could click a landing page only has one call to action. Only one thing they can do. Only one place. They can click only one thing for them to focus on. And it only has one message. It’s only about the execution of the one thing that you promised to them.
They’d get by going to that page, which we’re going to talk about that in a second and how to use it in your marketing, but the difference between a regular webpage and a landing pages, there is no navigation on the landing page. There are not a million different distractions that somebody can do. There is one very simple form for them to fill out and they’re either want to stay there and give you their contact information and receive what you are promising them or they don’t.
That is it. Okay. So that’s the difference between a regular website page and a landing page, some landing pages, you can scroll down a bit and we’re going to talk about the anatomy and what can be built on this page and a lot of great landing pages. It doesn’t even scroll what we call below the fold. Basically. There’s no place to scroll down to.
The only thing somebody sees is above what that is, is the fold on their computer, but landing pages can also convert really well when they are somewhat longer, not super long. You’re not trying to sell them a huge online program or trip to Disney world just a little bit longer. And again, we’ll dive into that here in part three. So to summarize the difference between a home page and a landing page is a landing page has zero navigation and only one call to action.
Okay. Heart to how to use a landing page in your marketing. So we use landing pages to give away something for free in exchange for a lead’s name, their email address, and maybe a little bit of other contact information, these assets, that thing you give away for free, they’re called lead magnets and rightfully so they magnetize leads to your business.
So it’s gotta be something awesome and great. You’re giving them away. You’re giving away for free in order to attract this lead to this landing page. And examples of lead magnets are PDFs, newsletter, signups documents, videos, tips, blueprints, and we have literally dozens of podcast episodes recorded on how to create good lead magnets and amazing assets. I’m not going to dive into that on today’s show.
So again, if you want to learn how to create great free assets bruise over to Sweetlife podcast.com and you can search all of our episodes for those free and amazing business trainings, but for the point of what we’re talking about here, we’re talking about how to use a landing page. We use the landing page in order to gather the lead in exchange for the asset,
the lead magnet you are giving away for free, and there are multiple different ways to actually use this landing page in your marketing. You can run ads to this landing page. You can hyperlink the link to this landing page from different assets. So you could have a QR code where somebody is going to scan. You could hand out a flyer and have a pretty link,
which we’ll talk about that in a minute or a clear link to your landing page that you want somebody to go to. So you can hyperlink to this page from another asset or a document you can link to your landing page in your social media header. So, great example of this is putting the link directly to your landing page in your Instagram business bio,
rather than sending somebody to your huge whole website, where they can, might get a little overwhelmed and lost. We know a lot of companies, and we’ve worked with a lot of companies with a strategy of putting the link to only your landing page and your Instagram business bio header for the one purpose of generating that lead, especially if you were using it in social media posts.
So if you’re putting out videos and you’re doing social media posts, particularly for Instagram, and you’re saying, go click on the link in our biography. Then you want to make sure that link in your biography is in fact, leading back to where you promise them to where they can get this really cool asset. So again, it’s great to use this link to this landing page in your Instagram or your other social media headers.
You can also use the link to this landing page and share it in email marketing. So if you’re sending out a blast email, maybe to people that are already on your email list, but you want to give them something else, or you want to gauge an interest for a new product or a new service you have, or maybe create a wait list for something you’re about to sell in the future.
You can create an email and send a link to a new landing page to those people on your list. A landing page is also really important to make sure you have, if you’re doing any events. So if you’re doing trade shows, if you’re at sporting events, if you are out and about, you want to make sure that you have a signup that’s available at your table or your booth,
that links directly to your landing page, not your whole entire webpage, because people are super busy using it just to directly link people to a landing page where they can very quickly follow their name and email address is a really important marketing strategy for you to grow your list from your hard work of being at that event. And then lastly, you also can use your landing pages in your marketing when you are speaking on stages or on podcasts or on interviews.
So if you were getting interviewed on this show, and I’m sure you’ve heard many guests here on this show before, and I’ll ask them so and so, where can people find you and where can people get what you’ve promised? You’re going to give them for free. They’re going to say the link to a landing page, not their whole entire website, because they want to capture your information to build a relationship with you.
So again, how to use landing pages in your marketing can be running ads to your landing page hyperlinking from established documents you have using your landing page link in the URL of your social media header in email marketing in social media posts, lead generation out events and speaking on stages podcasts or on interviews. Okay. Are you still with me? All right. Again,
all of the show notes and everything we’re talking about for this episode and the whole transcription of this episode is found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. So if you want to take notes and you’re on the go and you can’t just remember episode number 185, and you can get all of this over at our podcast website, okay. Now part three,
the anatomy of a landing page. This is actually what you should have on your landing page so that it converts really well. So the very first thing is you need to have a headline. This is a unique selling hook, and it’s the takeaway of what you’ve promised them. This is usually a catchy statement, but it also has to align with whatever marketing you use to get them there.
So if you told somebody, Hey, come over here and you can sign up to get a free bottle of water, but then they landed on this page and in you’re selling them sunscreen, it doesn’t connect, right? So make sure that the headline aligns with whatever marketing you’re doing to get them there. So it should be a super awesome hook. Yes,
I want to be on this page and they should actually be able to read your headline and just know right then that they want to give you their information. But beyond your headline, you should also have also include supporting copy. So this is usually a short paragraph or bullets to give extra information, including the benefits of what they’re about to get takeaways, maybe a small list of deliverables,
and basically what they can expect from giving you their information, because their information is very private. People are not apt just to throw around their email address anymore. Like they used to be. So you better be clear about why on earth. They should give you this. And you do that in the headline and in supporting copy. The third thing that should be on your landing page is telling a visual story.
So this can be done by sharing an image or a few different images or a video. So a short video is usually best, but here’s the deal you really need to get to the point. Now a year from now, I could be recording this same episode in the strategies might be different, but right now at the recording of this it’s summertime 2020.
If you’re going to put a video on your landing page, it’s gotta be short and to the point, and it has to back up what your headline says and what your supporting copy says. People do not have time, and they’re not going to sit there and watch a whole long video to decide whether or not they want to give you their name and email address.
But if you don’t want to do a video images work really, really well too. So make sure that the image tells a story about why they’re there or what they can expect from receiving the free thing that you’re giving them that lead magnet. You’re giving them an exchange for their name and email address. So that is number three, make sure your landing page tells a visual story.
Number four, and probably one of the most important things on this page. Now we’re talking about that one form. Your landing page has one call to action. This is one form. One thing for them to do one little place for them to fill out. There are no distractions. There are no menus. There is no navigation anywhere on this page.
You can have a copyright at the bottom of the page and based on what your industry says, have a terms and privacy policy on the footer of your page, but we’re not directing somebody to your blog or even your social media handles. We want to keep them here on this page. So the important thing with this form is you don’t want to ask for too much.
So a lot of businesses I work with, they get really excited about this form. The owner will say, well, we can ask them this and in their troubles here and where are they located? And Hey, let’s get their phone number too. That does not usually work 90% of the time. That is not going to work. Obviously, every industry is a little bit different,
but in the case that we’re talking about using this landing page and social media and digital marketing strategies, that’s usually not going to work. Okay. You want to not get totally overzealous and you don’t want to. I asked too many questions. You get to do that later. You get to build a relationship and find out more about your audience later. Right now,
the number one goal is to get their name and their email address. So you even have a chance to build a relationship with them and ask them more questions. If you asked too much upfront, it usually turns people away. And they’re like, there is no way I’m giving this strange company, all of this personal data on me, in some cases with some landing pages.
Now, a lot of companies are even avoiding asking their first name. They’re just asking for an email address. I still really think it’s important to ask somebody’s name because we need their name for you to have a relationship with them. That is a much more personal relationship in the future. But I will say that less is better on this particular landing page.
And then a fifth option of what you can add to this page is social proof. So this would be, these are comments from other clients that you’ve worked with before. People who have used your products, maybe photographs of other people who have used your product or you working face to face or in any other way with other customers that are happy. Social proof goes a really,
really long way. You know, every company is out there saying, Hey, we’re rad. We’re so great. We’re maybe even the best, buy my thing or get my free app set that I want to give you, but nothing confirms you’re good at what you do. Like having somebody else show and tell a new audience. And so having social proof on this landing page is a very important thing.
If you’re new in business and you don’t have that yet. No worries. It will come. So in summary, part three, the anatomy of your landing page, you need to have your headline is number one, your supporting copy is number two. Number three is your visual story. So what story are you telling through video and or photography? Number four is your one call to action form.
That’s it? One thing that you want them to do? The one action you want them to take when they visit this page, make it clear and simple, easy, and number five is social proof. And so this is the summary of what a landing page is and how to use it in your business. How to use it for digital marketing on today’s show.
We talked about the difference between a homepage or general website pages and a landing page. We talked about how to use a landing page in your marketing. And now, you know, if you didn’t before the anatomy of what is on a high converting landing page, and here’s a few here are, if you tool other things, I just wanted to share with you guys too.
So number one, if you have your Facebook pixel installed on your website correctly, and if you’re a listener to this show, then you should have that done. If you do not have that done, then again, go back to our podcast website and Google Facebook trainings and teach you how to do it here on the show. But if you have your Facebook pixel correctly installed on your website or the place where you’re building your landing page,
if it’s not included in your website and a visitor does not complete your form, say they land on your landing page, but they’re like, yeah, no, I don’t really think, I feel like giving April my email today. No worries. Because that Facebook pixel is installed. You can really target that viewer through future Facebook and Instagram ads or LinkedIn ads,
whatever type of ads you are running, as long as you have that pixel installed on this page. So that’s cool thing. Number one. All right. So don’t totally panic. If you aren’t converting, getting somebody to land on your page is also great and gives you huge leverage from a marketing digital marketing standpoint. Number two, one landing page done well can and should be used for future campaigns and generating ongoing leads.
So when you, as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, create one lead magnet that works really well, that you know is always going to generate you new leads. That’s our goal. You want to have one awesome rocking lead magnet. You might want to have 50 of them. That’s fine, but you can’t even have two, three, four or five until we do have one that we know is awesome.
And it’s doing the job by generating leads for you. So we start with one really good one. That’s the cornerstone of lead generation for you. When you do that, you only have to build this landing page once and you can run ongoing ads to it. So although it might seem like a bit of work to get this set up, and frankly it is,
even if you’re doing it on your own or subcontract in and out, it’s a bit of heavy lifting on a tech side to learn all this. But once you do this once, and once you have it in place, once you really shouldn’t have to do it again anytime soon. So that’s cool thing to note number two, and then cool thing to note.
Number three is when you get this link to your landing page, it’s probably going to be long and ugly. And based on where you build your website, you might, or you might not be able to actually edit that link. If you cannot edit that link, then I highly recommend you create what’s called a pretty link or a tiny URL or something that you can share.
So when you tell somebody verbally the name of your link, it’s memorable. So let me give you an example of this. We have a landing page, which I shared with you as a bonus in the beginning of this episode for you to go try out our very cool partner website host called Kajabi and get a 28 day free trial. We love Kajabi by the way.
And it’s our number one, go to that. We refer businesses to, to build amazing websites and landing pages, which is why we recommend them. And we use them ourselves. But if I were to say this link of where to go get it, it’s terrible, right? I can’t even regurgitate it now or even remember what the heck it is,
right? So we created what’s called a short, customized, or pretty link. And then we forwarded the short, customized, or pretty link to the ugly ass landing page link. And we did this through our own website. So the link I’m going to tell you to go to is April beach.com forward slash Kajabi. It’s K a J a B I super simple.
You’ll remember April beach.com forward slash Kajabi to go try out this great landing and webpage resource. That’s what I mean by creating a pretty link. For example, if I was up on a stage and talking about how to set up landing pages, I would go on that stage and I would say, Hey, and by the way, you can go to April beach.com
forward slash Kajabi to sign up for this free trial. It’s an easy thing to say verbally that people remember. So cool thing. Number three is make sure that you create a shortened easy to say, easy to remember link and have it redirect to your ugly ass landing page link, because that’s really going to help you be able to increase conversions from anywhere.
And it’s going to help people remember what your link is. If they didn’t have a chance to go to it, or they didn’t have a chance to write it down. So I just wanted to give you kind of those other insider tips when it comes to landing pages and here’s the deal. The summary of this whole show is digital marketing can be done on a huge scale.
It can be done on a small scale, but the first step in digital marketing is building this landing page and doing it well, I don’t care if you are a one man show, or if you have hundreds of employees, the best way to generate leads for your business so that you can build a relationship with them so that you can sell your services or products down the road is by building a great converting landing page.
That’s super simple and only has one call to action. And the best place to build this page is in your own website. So that each time you run a marketing campaign to it, and all of your hard work from social media posting and all of your marketing outreach is converting people back to your website, even though you don’t necessarily have the navigation on the page,
your still able to track the visitors to your site. There are a lot of different softwares out there that work really well, that just build landing pages. Our recommendation as a company is best practice is to have your landing pages built on your own website. And the easiest way to do that is building it through a website platform like to Jabi. And that’s why we recommend them and use them ourselves.
All right, you guys, I hope you found this incredibly beneficial. If you haven’t yet, we would really love for you to leave a review. It helps other listeners find this business training show that frankly, a lot of business strategists and companies charge thousands of dollars for the cumulative business trainings that I deliver and the experts that we are just so privileged to have on the show deliver for you as well.
So we really appreciate you listening again. All of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 85. You can try to build your landing page on your own through the 28 day trial@kajabibyvisitingaprilbeach.com forward slash Kajabi, and you are invited to join our exclusive online community app by visiting Sweetlife community.com. See there, I just gave you three very clear examples of pretty links that go to landing pages.
All right, you guys hope you’re having an awesome day and I will speak to you again next week. Thanks for being the listener here. Bye. For now

Episode 184: 4 Pitches To Land Your Dream Business Affiliates – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: 
“How To Create Winning Partnerships” 
July 16, 9am Pacific Time
Or Join our Community to catch the replay

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who want to create partnerships with other businesses, but aren’t sure how to approach them correctly. Getting eyes on your new business or product can be hard. This episode is for those who need an instant boost of fans and followers with a little help from (business) friends.

Summary:

One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s’ audience. In this episode, April Beach delivers 3 proven strategies you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses for mutual benefits. The more valuable you are as a partner, the more other companies will want to promote and work with you so how you pitch your company matters!

Highlights:

  1. Have 4 strategies to choose from to pitch businesses for partnership
  2. Know how to pitch, when and what to say
  3. Discover the secrets we’ve used to have companies in over 13 countries promote us for free

Resources Mentioned:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: “How To Create Winning Partnerships” July 16, 9am Pacific Time Click Here to Register
 
Or Join our Community to catch the replay
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey, and welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, love chatting with you. And today is really Kind of a part two episode of what we talked about last week. You are tuned into the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast,
and I know, especially now there are a trillion different podcasts that you could listen to. And I really love that you’re here hanging out with me. Thank you so much for that. I love helping you build your business. That is what the Sweetlife company, my company and my team. That is what we do. We’re dedicated to helping you launch and scale your business through digital marketing and online business strategies.
And this show continually now for 184 episodes gives you the steps to do that, that most business consulting firms charge thousands for. So I’m so glad that you’ve tuned in if this is your first time here. Thank you so much. Here is what you can expect from today’s show today. I’m going to download four different ways to land your dream business affiliates.
But before we dive into this today, I want to make sure that you’ve tuned into last week’s show. So episode number 183, I covered, you know, exactly how to pitch partners, the psychology behind pitching partners, really how to determine whether or not a business or an affiliate is actually good for you to partner with. And I gave you the pitch steps.
So if you didn’t actually tune in last week, just pause this episode and go back to episode number 183. And listen to that because what we’re talking about today is a followup to what we talked about last week. And these are a lot of important strategies to discuss. As a matter of fact, this is some of the work that I do with my private business clients that I helped develop their pitches and their relationships sometimes with really high profile brands that other companies can’t even begin to penetrate.
And so this is really important information, and I want to make sure that you are getting it and absorbing it, and you’re taking the steps so that you can go ahead and put it into action in your business. So again, if you didn’t listen to last, week’s please tune into last week’s. And this is what you can expect from today’s show.
So this particular episode is for those of you guys who want to create partnerships with other businesses, you aren’t exactly sure how to approach them correctly. So we covered a lot of the foundation last week, but today I’m giving you four different specific pitch strategies. So we’re really going to be driving into strategy today. So if you want to get eyes on your new business,
or if it’s time to scale your business, or if you’re launching new service or a new product, or if you want to reach a new audience, then these are great episodes for you to pay attention, to and to take these strategies. And here’s what you can expect from this show. So, first of all, here’s what we know. One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s audience and love that statement.
I love that quote, my friend, Cathy Hawn, who’s an online world-class online marketer. She’s been here on the show. She says that she says the best way to grow your businesses, to borrow someone else’s audience. And she’s totally right. So in this show, I’m going to give you the strategies that you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses,
for mutual benefits. And here’s what you need to know. The more value you are as a partner, the more other companies are going to want to promote you and work with you. And so how you pitch these companies is super important. You only get one shot at making an impression to show your value. And we want them to think, Oh shit,
like I have to work with this company. This company is going to make me look better. This company is going to make me make more money. Our audience is going to love us more because I’m partnering with whatever your company name is. And so that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you’re going to have four strategies to choose from,
to pitch businesses that you want to partner with. You’re going to know how to pitch and exactly in what order, and you can figure out what your strength is in this area to move forward and pitch them strategically incorrectly the first time. And of course, I love giving you guys bonuses with these episodes, frankly, only you action takers and those of you that are really serious about growing your business in certain areas are the ones that actually take us up on these bonuses.
They are insane. So the bonuses that go with last week and this week’s episode is that I am teaching a live stream this Thursday, July 16th, totally free. And I’m taking your questions about partnerships. So I’m going to work with you and hear your questions and give you recommendations on strategies on how to reach out to your gold star partners. So companies that you want to partner with and the people that you want to promote your business and business affiliates.
So in order to get on that live stream totally free, you just need to join our new Sweetlife business community app. We have our own private community networking app. Super awesome. We just built it and you can join there for free by going to Sweetlife community.com. And once you join, you just click on events and you can register to join me in this Thursday’s live stream.
So we’d love to have you in there and very happy to help you build your business. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show strategies, all of the show notes from this episode and all the links that I mentioned in here can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight, four<inaudible>. Okay. So we’ve already established that you have to listen to last week’s episode.
If you haven’t, you aren’t even cheating. It’s just that what we’re talking about here, isn’t going to work as well, unless you’ve tuned into episode number 183, but the rule of thumb that you need to follow when pitching any company is you have to give first. So anytime you’re reaching out, we actually talk about this a lot on the show,
even outside of this specific context, but anytime you’re reaching out and you want to work with somebody, or you want to be part of what they’re doing, you always reach out by giving and you want to ask questions like, how can I help you? How can I help you serve your audience better? How can we support your goals as a business?
And again, we talked about that a lot in last week’s episode. So here in today’s episode, I’m not going to dive into that, but it’s important that you know, that those are the most important foundations for you to reach out first with. So you’re going to get four different pitch strategies here, and you can pick and choose which one you want.
And I promise you, we have not only used these strategies and both of my own companies. If you guys don’t know, I own two international business consulting firms and I have for 17 years, but this is what our clients use to land their dream business partners and affiliates. So you can definitely take what I’m telling you to the bank. All right.
So pitch option number one is to share great content for that desired partner to post. So here’s what we know. Content is King and great businesses are always looking for great content to deliver. So if you write excellent articles or if you make engaging videos, or if you create other types of content that can make that potential affiliate that you want to work with,
look awesome to their clients, do it totally do it. Content is one of the most powerful ways to create partnerships and connect with an audience. And so here’s some quick steps to do that. Number one, reach out with an Epic, original sample of your content that you want to share. So reach out, make sure it is really good, what you’re sharing with them.
And I want you to provide around three samples of your content. You can provide writing samples, you can provide video samples or audio samples. And when you’re reaching out, share with them, say, Hey, we have this great content. I would love for you to post it. This is original content, and here’s the most important thing here. It has to be original.
So this is something that you’ve never put on your own website. You’ve never shared across social media. You, especially with these gold star partners that you really want to work with, you want to provide them something original that can be found nowhere else, because that gives them a marketing advantage over their competitors. And it’s important for search engine optimization. So pitch number one is to share great content with your particular partners that you want to work with,
reach out to them and say, Hey, here you go. You’re invited to share this it’s original content. And obviously your company is going to get credit for the content. It’s actually a great way for you to be in front of your partner’s audience and they can see your face or hear your voice or read your writing. So that’s pitch option. Number one,
pitch option. Number two is to offer, to host an event for that particular affiliate companies are always looking to be the experts. So we, we all want to be seen as the leader in our space. So in this one, this type of pitch, you’re basically going to stroke their ego. And that gets really far in a lot of ways,
okay, this is business, it’s the truth. All right. So you can invite that potential partner to speak to your audience on a social media live stream in a video interview that you can host later and you can share with your audience, their content. So I know this isn’t going directly in front of their audience instead, you’re inviting them to come into your audience,
but it really does make them see you in the beginning of this relationship is a valuable resource and somebody that they want to work with. So you would invite that potential partner to speak to your audience and tell them that you’re going to be sharing this content with your audience and making sure that you’re tagging them when you’re sharing the content and you’re including them in it.
And here is like a gold star bonus. Nobody does this. You guys have to do this. I promise you it will be the advantage. It’s also one of the most important ways that one of our seals, our logo seals, and one of my first companies became internationally recognized. So here is the secret. Are you ready? Okay. Create a graphic logo.
It’s not your business logo necessarily, but create a version of a logo that your partner can use and share across social media. This logo could be an as seen on or as featured by your business name or proud partner of, and then your business name, whatever it is, create graphics for them to pimp out on their social media. Sorry, I just said pimp out hope that doesn’t offend somebody about on their social media put on their website.
And so they could beep up like as seen on kind of as if you were in our podcast. If you were on my podcast, you’d get a whole entire zipped up file of a ton of promo logos that you can use saying as seen or heard or featured on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Same thing. I want you to do this for your desired business partners.
And the second secret bonus is to create done for them, social media graphics. So take their headshots, put that little logo on there and send back images to them so they can put it out on their Instagram stories and their LinkedIn content and wherever else they’re established on social media. So you’re literally doing all the work for them. You’re inviting them to come teach to your audience and not only is that great for them.
And they’re seeing you as a great potential partner to work with more in the future, but frankly it makes your business look really, really good, especially those of you guys who are new in business in the first couple of years, bringing in experts, bringing in partners, makes your business look like the GoTo. And it’s an important thing to do. So that is pitch.
Number two is to invite the partner to come in, to teach or to speak. And I gave you the gold star marketing strategies. After that pitch, number three is to teach for them. So this is identifying their needs, identifying maybe some of the things they aren’t delivering as far as content to their audience and reach out and offer to speak for them,
reach out and offer to teach. And you do this by sending them speaker one pager or immediate press or pitch pack. We’ve talked about this on numerous shows before. If you haven’t tuned into our shows on how to land any speaking gig that you want, then make sure after you’re done listening to this episode, all you have to do is cruise back to Sweetlife podcast.com
and you can search all of our shows for that particular content and find all the strategies that teach you how to do that as well. So here in pitch, number three, we’re going to establish you as the expert. So you want to reach out with a list of topics that you can teach to their audience. Again, you want to do the research.
You want to identify what you feel like their needs are maybe some weaknesses within their market. And you want to provide the solution to that. You want to fill that hole for them and offer to teach for them at no charge. This could be a live stream on their social media. This could be in an event. This could be just frankly, creating a video and letting them post it on their YouTube channel,
whatever it is, reach out and offer to deliver expert content for them. And then pitch number four is to collaborate, to create something new. This is when you reach out really authentically and just say, Hey, I’d love to discuss the opportunities to create something new together. It can be a new product. It can be a new service or an event.
It could be a live stream collaboration or an online summit. It could be even a local event. The sky’s the limit when it comes to collaborations. So let me give you a good example of a case study of this in real time. My other company, I own baby planner inc, is the international leader in business consulting and development strategy for companies that market to new and expecting moms.
And there is a company that we partner with that also offers business coaching for that niche. They train sleep coaches, and they really want to provide the business strategy of developing a company, but that isn’t their expertise. So we are working together to create a collaboration where we bring in our business development trainings for that niche market and their expert sleep certifications. And it’s a complete business package if you will,
for these types of professionals, again, super niche, super specific. And so when you’re thinking about what this could look like for you think along those lines, like what can you create with other businesses that reach the same audience, but they may be missing something that’s different for every single industry. I just wanted to give you a case study and an example of some of the ways that we do this and that we are currently doing this right now so that your wheels can be turning.
So again, we’re developing the business development coaching, and they’re developing the skill set coaching. If you have some sort of a collaboration like that, that you can do within your niche, do it find it that is pitch number four, a collaboration to create something new that has never existed, or that it’s never been as awesome as you and your new ability a business affiliate can make it together.
All right. So here’s a recap of four very specific ways that you can pitch to land your dream business affiliates. Number one is sharing great content for that affiliate to post. Number two is hosting an event and inviting that affiliate to come and teach for your audience with all of the seals and logos and marketing. Number three is teaching for them to their audience.
And number four is collaborating to create something new. Now, let me speak to those of you guys that are brand new in business so that we’re just talking about the elephant in the room. I know that you might not have a huge list yet. That’s okay. You want to find the partners that may also be new and create partnerships with newer companies or companies that are looking to expand,
or maybe at the same stage of business development as you are. If you are a brand new business and you’re reaching out and you want to partner with Proctor and gamble, that might be a little stretch at first. Is it doable? Yes. We’d done it with clients before. Yes. Using these same four strategies. So go big, go for it.
But I also want to say, if you’re not really sure about what sort of collaborations you want for your company, maybe starting out with a business it’s in the same development phase or a little bit ahead of where your company is, is a great place to start. Okay. So that’s today’s episode. I hope you found this incredibly informative and taking action on it right now.
So to take action, choose which collaboration method you think is going to work best for your company to start and identify three top business affiliates that you want to reach out to right now to develop this relationship again, choose your pitch and choose three different affiliates that you can reach out to. And you can develop this collaboration. And the goal is to borrow their audience to grow yours.
It’s absolutely synergistic. It’s perfect for both businesses in giving and building mutually beneficial business partnerships and brand collaborations is really the way businesses are going to grow in the future. And this is a way to get started in that. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I love chatting with you guys. If you haven’t yet, I would really appreciate it.
If you cruise over to Apple podcasts and left us a review, we read them all the time and along those lines, I just wanted to give a special thanks to a podcast reviewer, Terry Schmidt. Thank you so much. She said it’s practical, relevant, no nonsense podcast. April is extremely generous with the amount of detailed time-tested business advice that she gives on each podcast.
She’s very clear on who can benefit from each training and delivers the content in a way that makes it easy to take action right away. If you’re an entrepreneur working to launch scale and grow your business online and appreciate down to earth and relevant advice, I highly recommend this podcast. Thank you so much, Terry, for that review. And we really do appreciate all the reviews and sharing this podcast with your friends.
You can just click up arrow as you’re listening to this show and share it on your Instagram stories. And especially if you’re listening to it on Spotify, we are on every single podcast platform, even Pandora now, which apparently you really don’t listen to Pandora unless you’re over 40 like me, but I love Pandora. So it was really, it was really exciting for me when we got on Pandora a few years ago.
So I appreciate your time. I hope you guys have an awesome week. It’s always great to pour into your business. It’s such a privilege to do so, and we’ll catch you next week. Again. Join me for the live stream this Thursday, July 16th. If you want personalized business strategy and help to create your partner pitch to get in there, you just go to Sweetlife community.com.
Join our online community app and you will find the invitation to join us. Live this Thursday. All right, you guys have an awesome week. Talk to you soon.

Episode 183: 4 Steps To Land Any Business Affiliate Partnership You Want – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) Live Stream July 16 – How to Create Winning Partnerships – Join our new online community app for free to attend. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

New businesses – Stage 2 – Launch – Looking for affiliate and companies to network and partner with.
 
Establishes Companies – Stages 3, 4, 5 – Who need fresh eyes and buzz on a new product or offer to who are looking to expand into a new market.

Summary:

When was the last time you pitched a partner and landed it? Fact is… most companies don’t have the time to pay attention to your attempts to work with them, offer your support, or to simply connect professionally. But you need healthy partnerships to grow your business, brand, and sales and you only want to work with the best. So what should you do? 
 
To land the best business affiliates you need to say the right things, approach them on the right way and present your business as an asset they can’t live without.  In this show, I’m breaking down 3 tips to plan, pitch, and land any partner you want. These are the same proven strategies I’ve been teaching since 2008 which landed me partnerships with brands like WholeFoods Market, TheBump.com, Patagonia, Britax, Women’s Entertainment Network, and more. 

Highlights:

  1. Who will make the best partners for your business
  2. How to make a plan to work with them
  3. Exactly what to say to close the affiliate deal

Resources Mentioned:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) Live Stream July 16 – How to Create Winning Partnerships – Join our new online community app for free to attend.  SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love FASTA with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show this week, we’re diving into how to create amazing partnerships for your business and amazing affiliate relationships. And the reason why I was so excited to do this episode is because I get questions all the time from businesses in my community.
How do I pitch people? How do I work with this gold star partner? Or how do I get this company to promote my material or my content, or how do I partner with this business leader? And there are very specific ways in which you should be reaching out to certain partners to get what you want. So in this show specifically, this is for those of you guys who are new in business.
So this means you’re in stage two of my lifestyle business system. That’s where you’re still just launching your business, but you’re looking for affiliate partners and companies to network with that are really going to help you get your company off the ground. Or this is also for those of you guys who are in stages three, four or five of my lifestyle business growth system.
This means you probably have a new product that you want fresh eyes on, or you want new buzz around new services that you’re launching, or maybe even you just want to start pivoting into a new market. And so you are looking for brands and partners to reach out to that you can work with. There are mutually beneficial partnerships. So in today’s episode,
we are diving into all of those things. And you’re going to know all the tricks in how I was able to land amazing partnerships in my first company I ever launched. As a matter of fact, the strategies that I’m teaching to you here today are the same proven strategies that I’ve been teaching since 2008. And they have landed me partnerships with brands like whole foods market,
the bump.com, Patagonia, bright techs, women’s entertainment network and more. So this show is totally packed with amazing information that you can bank on. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know who will make the best business partners for your company, just because they might look good when you first reach out to them, doesn’t necessarily mean they’re going to be the best partner for you.
So I’m going to talk you through how to figure out who’s going to be the best partner for your business. You’re also going to know how to make a plan to work with them because it’s important that you’re organized. And you’re going to know exactly what to say to them, to close your affiliate or business partnership deal. So if you’re ready for that,
we’re going to dive in to all of that. Right now, you can find all the show notes, everything that I’m chatting about on today’s Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast, by cruising over to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 83. And if you and I have never spoken before, it’s nice to meet you. My name’s April beach, I’m an online business development expert,
and I am so glad that you were here. Let’s do it.<inaudible>. So when was the last time you actually reached out to a partner in landed it, or have you never done this before? Because you have no idea how to even approach a company that you want your business to work with. So the fact of the matter is, is most companies,
they really don’t have time to pay any attention to you. You know, companies aren’t out there begging for different companies to partner with, especially those that are leading the way in their industry. And so sometimes your attempts to have them pay attention to you, just because you want to offer them support, or you want to simply connect with them. Professionally are falling to the wayside,
frankly, they’re too freaking busy, right? And you get that. I get that time is more valuable than money, but you need these healthy partnerships to grow your business. Some of you guys listening have to have these partnerships because you can’t, in fact, even sell your products or services without them, or you’re going to end up spending hundreds of thousands of dollars in marketing,
which you don’t need to do as long as you can lay into the right partners. So how do you do this? Let’s go ahead and break it down. And I’m actually going to give you the four steps. Now, there are a lot of notes in here, and I know that you’re probably driving your car to work, or you’re at the gym or you’re cooking dinner or whatever it is that you’re doing when you’re listening to this show.
And you probably don’t have a piece of paper and a pen in front of you. This is one of those shows that it would be really beneficial if you could jot down some notes so that you remember, because I’m actually giving you step-by-step, that’s going to save you years of time. So if you’re too busy and if you have yet to join us yet in our new sweet life entrepreneur and small business owner,
online forum, we’re super excited about it. We just launched a brand new custom app for you guys to connect with other businesses and you can join us free right now during the month of July, by visiting sweet life, community.com. And I’m going to actually drop in the show notes from this episode into that community. So if you’re too busy and you’re just like,
your life is like mine, and we’re always running around like crazy, then cruise over and join Sweetlife community.com. As long as you join in July, it’s free for life. And I’m going to drop these show notes in there for you. On top of that, with this episode, before I dive into any more detail, I’m also teaching a free livestream business strategy session on how to create winning partnerships on July 16th in that community.
So join that community. You’ll get to join the live stream. Plus you’ll get all the show notes from this episode, but let me go ahead and break the four steps for you to get started right now. So I can give you immediate result right away. So one is to do your research now, just because you think a partner may be a good partner,
doesn’t mean that they actually, well, here are the things that you want to look for when you are looking for really great affiliates or partnerships. The first question you want to ask yourself as do they reach your ideal audience. So a lot of times you might look at a partner and think that they do, but here is how to know your audience has a lifespan.
They have a journey that they’re going through in your business, just like other businesses usually serve a clientele within a certain part of their journey. Now you want to look for partners that serve your clientele, your customers, before they need your service or your product or your offer. The perfect partner is the one that is reaching your clients right before your clients are going to need what you sell.
There are a lot of great partnerships that you think just because they serve the same market or the same niche audience, that they might be cool people for you to work with. But the fact of the matter is, is, you know, I only want to identify who they serve. You want to identify when they serve your ideal audience. So do your research first,
dive in, find out when they connect with your audience, because you want to be the very next step to what that audience needs and the best partners are the ones that get to your ideal client and promote your services right before your clients. I need to find you. So that’s step number one, step number two is what is this company or what is this partner missing?
So what are the things that their clients want that they don’t currently provide? What do they not provide as far as content? Or what sort of service are they not currently providing? Or what sort of service or content or material, or perhaps products are currently providing, but frankly they’re doing it just cause they have to, it, isn’t something that’s part of their ideal business operations.
They’ve identified that they’re missing it. So they’re doing it, but maybe they aren’t really great at it. Maybe it’s not their, you know, Ninja skill. Maybe it’s not their specific zone of genius. So what is this partner missing? What does it not do for their clients currently that could make this partnership even better by you stepping in and providing it,
or what are they currently providing to the clients that maybe they don’t want to be. Maybe it’s costing them more money to provide this type of a service. And this is a great opportunity for you to either Jennifer these items in step in and save the day. What do you have that could make them look better, be better at what they do perform their services better and actually be an overall perfect provider to their clientele.
So here’s some examples of this. If you’re a dietitian, you could be an amazing partner for a supplement company. If you’re a copywriter, you could be an amazing partner for a marketing firm. If you’re a doula, you could be an amazing partner for a baby carrier company. If you’re a staffing company, you could be an amazing partner for a service based business and the list goes on and on.
So after you’ve done your research, take a look at the partners before you pitch them and identify what are they missing or what are they doing that maybe they don’t want to be doing? Maybe they don’t do as well as you could do. And how can you make them look like the best by bringing your services or your content or your materials to their business platform or their physical local business location.
Step number three is making a plan like we talked about in the beginning. Everybody’s incredibly busy if you show up and you’re all frazzled and you don’t have a plan, they are never, ever, ever going to take two seconds to listen to you because immediately they’ll identify that working with you is going to cost them time and money. So you need to have an organized plan and you need to be easy to work with.
And here’s how you do that. First of all, get your systems in place, whatever it is that you’re delivering or providing have systems in place already, that you are able to bring that to this new company. You don’t want to start out by trying new systems in a new partnership. That’s going to fail and it’s not going to be great for your brand.
And we don’t want you to present yourself and have that sort of business brand partnership, rep representation or reputation. So, first of all, we want to make sure you’re super easy to work with and your systems are in place. And then you want to present a plan for how you’re going to contribute or work with this partner. So how will you contribute your content or your services?
When will you do that? And what will this look like? You need to come to the table with a simple plan. That is not only easy for the person you’re speaking to to understand, but it’s easy for that person to present your plan to the decision maker. In most cases, the first person that you talk to in a business to partner with them,
isn’t the decision maker who gets to actually choose whether or not they’re going to partner with your company. So you have to present a simple, organized plan so that the first connection you have can easily explain the benefits of working with you and how it’s going to make them more money and how it’s going to make them look better to the decision maker. But in that you need to offer to amend your plan and you need to be willing to,
to all their needs. So you can suggest specifics on how you can work together. That’s simple to understand and easy to implement based on what they need. So although you’re coming to the table with a plan, that’s going to make you look like a rock star. Believe me, trust me. You’re coming to the table with the plan. You’re saying,
here’s what we can do. This is what it could look like. And this is how we want to help you. But the very next thing you’re going to say is, however, I want to hear what you need. What does your company need and how can we meet those needs for you? And you need to be a really good listener. And at that point in time,
you might want to go back, modify your plan and re, present your plan to them again, after you’ve listened and have to, after you’ve been able to perfectly hear their words and their struggles and their pains and figure out how your company can solve that. So that’s step number three. You have to have a plan. You have to be super organized and you have to be a good listener and be willing to change your plan based on what they need.
And then the very last step is more like a rule, but it’s incredibly important. Anytime you reach out to any partner, you have to understand that it’s not about you. It has absolutely nothing to do with you and your company. You need to reach out with a servant’s heart. You need to reach out giving first. You need to reach out in a way that you have zero expectations for how it’s going to turn around and promote your company immediately.
Especially if you are a new business. Now, I’m not saying you give everything away for free and you’ll be a martyr to this company, but it really has little to do with you. It is a mutually beneficial brand or affiliate partnership that works for both of you. And you need to start first by reaching out and presenting how you can give, let me give you a really quick scenario of this.
People reach out to me all the time and they want to be on this podcast all the time. I mean, I have so many applications for guests on this show. You guys, I can’t even get through them all. And the reality is is that the people that reach out, they send us emails or they go through the application process. And it’s clearly about promoting their business,
their brand, their services, their offers, and their sales. I mean, shit. I don’t even sell my own coaching programs on here hardly ever. This is a show where we are pouring into entrepreneurs and small business owners. It’s not about a show where you pimp out your services. And so those people that reach out and they want to be guests on this show that pitch us like,
Hey, I want to promote this. And I want to share what a great coach I am or whatever. They immediately go in the trash because it’s clear to us that they aren’t about serving you guys it’s clear to us. So they aren’t about providing proven business strategies and trainings that you guys can take to the bank. And that’s our mission. That’s what we do here on this show.
We’re a serving first company and that comes through in every single one of our podcast episodes. And so the same thing goes to reaching out to any business partner, even though yes, from a business strategy standpoint, we want you to create amazing partnerships. You can increase your profit and sales and you can be the leader in your space. Of course, we’re going to want you to make more money.
That is the point of making partnerships. However, when you lead with a giving first attitude with a servant’s heart, with these type of ways and saying, Hey, how can I help you? How can I make your company look better? How can we fill holes that are bottlenecks within your business? That’s how you’re going to land any partnership that you want that is looking for partners.
So to summarize, here’s what we talked about on today’s show. First of all, I mentioned to you join our live stream on July 16th, where we’re going to be talking about all this, and I’m going to be taking your questions on how to pitch your dream business partners. You can join us. Step. Number one is join our online forum and our community totally free.
You can just visit Sweetlife community.com, join our forum for free and then click on events and you can join me there in the live stream. I would love to talk to you and help you. And I will put all the show notes. So we talked about in the show notes for this episode on our podcast website, which can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one 83.
And I’m also going to put detailed show notes of what we talked about in the forums. You have to be in the community to get all the detailed show notes, again, visit Sweetlife community.com. And on today’s show, we talked about these four steps. Number one, do your research, not every partner that looks great on paper is a great partner for you.
Number two, find out what they’re missing. How can you make what they do better, faster, easier. How can you make them more money? When you make them more money, you’re gonna make more money. Step number three, make a plan, be organized, present yourself in an organized fashion, but also be willing to listen and amend your plan to meet their needs.
And step number four is to be selfless. I don’t care how big your company is, whether you’re a solo entrepreneur and you’re just one person, or you have a team of 15 or 20 every single time you lead with helping others. First, your company is going to grow faster. I promise. All right, you guys, well, it’s always so great to talk to you again,
cruise over and join us in our new online community app and forum. I am so glad to be out of Facebook. And so I’d love to have you join us in our new app. It’s super fun to play with, and it’s been great to see so many new podcast fans and faces join us over@sweetlifecommunity.com. And then next week we’re actually going to be continuing this same topic where I’m going to give you three specific pitches,
three specific things that you can do to reach out to pitch and land partners. So we’re going to be talking about this for a couple of weeks. If you aren’t a subscriber to this show, please click, subscribe and share this show with your friends. We totally appreciate your help and support. All right, you guys have an awesome week and I’ll see you soon.

Episode 182: Should Your Company Launch an Online Community or Group? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established businesses who want to know if you should create an online community. 

Summary:

Groups are all the rage. Facebook groups, LinkedIn Groups, Slack Channels and more. And you might be wondering if you should create a “group” for your followers, fans and clients. In this episode, we’re talking about the three most common types of groups, what companies these groups are ideal for as well as steps to get started with launching a community group for your company.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if your company should launch an online community
  2. Learn the 3 currently popular community types 
  3. Have the 5 steps to get your group started

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate, everybody. And welcome back to episode number 182 of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. Today, we’re talking about whether or not your company should be launching an online community or an online group of some kind.
And so we’re going to dig into this here just in a minute, but I wanted to say, thanks so much for being here and tuning into this show. All of our episodes here are about helping you build a profitable business so that you can live life on your terms for some of you guys and might just be spending more time with your kids or working remotely or traveling everybody’s dream is different,
but the business strategies that we deliver here on this show give you step by step actions every single week for the last three and a half years to make that happen. And so I love that you’re here. My name’s April beach. If we have not met each other before now, all the show notes from today’s episode in everything that we’re going to talk about can be found by going to a quick link over at our podcast website.
That is Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight two. This is episode number 182. And again, we are talking about, should your company launch an online community or group? And this particular show is for those of you guys who are in phases three, four or five of my lifestyle, business roadmap. If you don’t know what I’m talking about, I’m the creator of the lifestyle business roadmap.
There are actually five phases to design, launch, and scale a business to deliver that life that you want. And so you can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz, and just answer a couple of really quick questions and you’re going to get the whole entire roadmap. It’s actually a map that you’ll receive plus exactly what you should be working on right now in your business and a checklist to get your business to the next growth stage.
Again, you can find that quiz over@sweetlifecode.com forward slash quiz. And this show is geared towards those of you guys who are in stages three, four or five. Okay? So on this show, again, we’re diving into those of you who want to know if you should be creating an online community. And here’s the deal we’re talking about this because communities and groups are all the rage,
Facebook groups, LinkedIn groups, Slack channels, and more, and you might be wondering, you know, should we be creating a group for our people, for our followers? Do our fans need a group? Do our clients need a place to connect? Why on earth would we do that? So in this episode, we’re talking about the three most common types of groups,
what companies these groups are ideal for as well as I’m giving you the steps to launch a group community so that you can get going right away. If after listening, you realize this is a good move for you. The reality is a lot of companies launch groups, just because everybody else is doing it. And that’s stupid, right? That’s a waste of time and money.
If it doesn’t strategically fit into what you were doing as a company. So at the end of this episode, you’re going to know the three most common types of groups. These are free groups that businesses launch what types of business each group is good for. And you’re going to have the five steps to get started launching your group community. Okay. All the show notes can be found@sweetlifecode.com
forward slash one 82. Let’s go<inaudible>. Okay. So digging in here immediately, let’s talk about the common types of free groups that are being launched and really what we’re seeing with digital marketing and online relationship building right now. So the first type of group that you may want to consider launching as a free group for your fans or your followers, this is really good for those of you who have a podcast or you’re another media outlet,
or you yourself are a personal brand or a public figure. So it could be a fan group. It could be a place for people to connect and talk about some of the content that you are releasing. And it’s a free group for people just to connect basically because they really like you. And that’s maybe a good opportunity for you as a company, if you haven’t started a group yet.
So that first group is that fan group or that follower group. And that could potentially be a great fit for you. The second most common type of group is a free group for your clients. So this is actually for paying clients, clients that are paying you, but it would be creating a group for people who are paying you to connect. It’s an added value or an added bonus,
along with your services or your product that you sell to them. So it could be creating a free group for somebody to talk about your nutrition product, or somebody to talk about your vacation resort or whatever it may be. It’s a free group for those people who are already consuming your product or your services. And it gives them a great way to connect with one another share stories and maybe even help each other navigate through some of the resources that your company provides.
And then the third type of free group is a group to generate new leads. Now, this is an ideal group, but only for certain businesses. Okay? So what this group is it, the purpose of it is to create a group, to bring new people in that might not be using your service. They might not be using your product. They might have actually even heard of you before.
So this type of group it’s free for them, but it’s certainly going to cost you money in order to grow this type of a community, you’re going to want to run ads to it. And you’re going to want to put money behind it. Maybe even bring in some sort of affiliate partners and have other people filter new leads into your group. The purpose of this is to then have an opportunity to talk with them,
connect with them one on one in turn them from what we call a cold audience that has no idea who you are, but they may be interested in what you do into a warm audience who is then interested in what you do and they know who you are, and they’re starting to trust you. So that’s the third type of a group. And really the recommendation behind it is you need to have some money to put behind it because we are trying to convert a cold audience into a warm group of people that know like,
and trust you. And that does take money to do it in an expedited fashion. So the three types of groups we talked about are number one, this free group, for those of you guys who are again, a, uh, social media, public figure podcast, or any of media outlets, that’s going to be a fan group that could be a great fit for you.
Second type of group is for those of you guys, you could be a private business or a private, even service company of some sort. And you’re connecting people who are already your clients with each other in order so that they can build relationships and get really excited about what you do and what you sell. And then that third type of group is a cold lead generation group that you need to have money behind it in order to generate new leads into your business.
So hopefully that gives you kind of a clear understanding of that. The different types of groups that are available in the reality is, is that there are tons of paid groups. We’re not talking about this on this podcast. We’re talking about free community groups and really helping you get clarity as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, perhaps you’re even leading a division within your corporation.
And you’re listening here and you’re wondering, wow, you know, should we have a group? Hopefully this gives you a little bit more clarity on that. Now let’s talk about the five different steps to get started. If you’ve decided, Hey, yeah, maybe we should dive into this. Here you go. I’m going to make it really simple for you.
This is super high level, but these are rarely important things to make sure that your time and your assets are used wisely. So step number one is you have to start with why we all love Simon Sinek. We all know that the start with why theory almost all entrepreneurs do, and it is so important. And so I’m not just saying this because everybody else says it.
I want you to dive into these four specifics. Number one, you need to have a clear purpose and objective for your group. Okay? So what is the purpose behind what you’re doing? Why on earth are you actually launching this community or this group? Number two? What can people expect from your group? When somebody joins your group? What’s the experience that you’re going to give them or the content that you are going to give them when they jump in there and they take their precious time,
which in my opinion is more valuable than money, then what’s going to happen. What can they expect from being part of your group or your community? The third thing you need to be able to answer is why should people join your community? What is in it for them? Why is your community different than other communities? Why should they go ahead and click the button to spend some time with you or to connect with your other customers or leads or fans over being somewhere else.
And then the last question, these are four questions underneath bullet point. Number one, which is start with why this last question is, what does success look like for your company? You know, when you’re hosting a group, what do you want out of this? Are you looking for sales conversions? If so, how many people in your free group do you expect to convert into paying clients?
What is that conversion that you expect for spending your time and your resources on creating and managing this community? Or are you looking to actually hit certain sales benchmarks? So from this community, are you expecting to increase your sales by $10,000 every couple of weeks or months because of the people that are in this community, or are you very simply just looking to grow your list of leads?
Having a live interactive leads list is a very powerful asset for a company. Even if you aren’t going to sell to them right now, even if maybe you aren’t even ready to convert them into paying clients, having an interactive leads list with the names and the email addresses and contact information is a huge asset to a business, especially those of you who want to build companies to sell.
So number one is, start with why what’s the purpose behind this community? What can people expect? Why on earth should they be joining your community over other communities? And what does success look like to your company for hosting this group? That is number one, please answer those four questions. And as you go through, you’re going to have even more questions for yourself,
which is a great part of business development. Okay. Step number two is what content are you delivering? What are you sharing with them? What is the value they are getting? Or what doors perhaps are you opening for them within your community or within your online group? What discounts, what sneak peaks or new releases or bonuses, what does that look like?
What do you want to give people in your group so that they know that they’re special and that they know that they’re appreciated for being part of that community? Number three is how frequently are you going to share this content or these assets with your group? How frequently are you going to be in there? Or is somebody going to be in there actually talking with them or delivering live videos or recorded videos?
How frequently are you dropping content into your community? Number four is who’s going to manage your community. If you’re a solo entrepreneur, you’re doing all the things right now, but you have to be able to build systems. You can delegate, you can grow your company. If you are a small business. And, you know, you have anywhere from five to 15 employees,
who’s in charge of building the relationships and nurturing the relationships within your community. Do you need to hire somebody for that? Should you hire a virtual assistant or do you have somebody on your team that you can delegate this to, or do you have to be present yourself as the CEO or as the COO or whatever your title is? Is that a necessary part?
And if so, how often do you want a need to be present within your community? And then the fifth question you’re going to want to answer your for yourself is what platform are you going to use? Again, I could record a podcast on each one of these platforms and we’ll dive in a little bit with some more details here after I summarize what we’ve just talked about on the show,
but really high level, the most common platforms that you can choose from are mighty networks, which all go on a little mighty network tangent here in just a sec. So mighty networks, LinkedIn groups, disciple media, or a Facebook group. Those are the most common group platforms I also could add into their Slack channel. Slack channels are getting really popular.
So let’s go ahead and throw Slack channels in there as well. I know many of you use them just to communicate with colleagues and I mean, there’s so many other platforms, but these are really that the highest level, most common platforms that are currently being used to host online communities and groups. So let’s go ahead and let me do a summary and recap for you.
If based on the types of free groups we talked about in the beginning of this show, you’re like, yes, I want to do this. Here are your five steps. Number one, start with why, why are you creating this community? Number two, what content are you going to deliver? Number three, how frequently are you going to deliver that content?
Number four, who’s going to manage your group. And number five, what platform are you going to create and launch your group in? Okay. I hope you guys found that incredibly helpful. I want to save you time and figuring this stuff out on your own and the purpose of this. And actually all of our podcast episodes is to save you time so that you can intentionally and strategically grow your business and make more money faster.
If you want to dive in more, all of the show notes that I talked about again, can be found in the show notes section of our business, which is found@sweetlifepodcast.com. And the episode that we’re on is number 182. So it’s Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight two. Okay. Now let me give you this little post discussion about platforms, those of you guys who listened to last week show,
no that I’ve hosted Facebook communities for years. I can’t even count how many years. It’s at least six years. I think it’s seven. It’s been a long time. And because of Facebook security issues, our account was hacked. Anyway, we lost all access to our communities. And this has just happened so many times. And as a company, I was just becoming concerned about continuing to have my groups in a platform that has been difficult to say the least.
And I want you to know this. However, it doesn’t mean, I don’t think that you should. I just have this gift of killing Facebook. Somehow you guys just keep are really real with you. Facebook and April beach do not get along. And we’ve had multiple issues over the years. So I’m not saying it’s not a great platform for anybody else.
I’m just saying it didn’t work for us. So we did tons of research. I also hosted LinkedIn groups in the past, and I am so excited to announce that we have created our own custom community app and group in a network called mighty hosts. It’s absolutely amazing. And we have hundreds of businesses just in the last 24 hours who have joined us over there.
It’s super cool. You guys, I’m going to geek out and I’ll be really honest with you, you know, mighty networks and mighty house. They aren’t, I’m not an affiliate of theirs. They aren’t paying me to tell you about this platform. It’s just been really amazing. Is it perfect? No, but it is definitely something I want to share with you as a business owner,
that we’re very happy transitioning to this platform. And I know that so many people in our new community have asked me to talk about this within the last 24 hours of joining. And so this little blurb here is for those of you guys in my business community, because I promised you I would talk about mighty networks. And so if you would like to over and join us in mighty networks,
this is a place where you can network with other business owners. So you get to create your own profile, your own business links, your own social media links, and even write a blurb about your company. It’s a very cool platform to grow your relationships with other businesses and potential leads. Number one, number two, we are releasing high level business masterclasses to our community.
We love this platform and we’re doing it here and it’s all totally free for a limited time. It’s going to be free forever, but you have to join us during this opening time as we transition over to mighty networks. So as long as you join in the month of July, you are going to get into our business community totally free and be able to play around with it and download the app.
And so this is my official invitation to you. If you would like to join the Sweetlife entrepreneur and small business hub in our custom app, you can totally do it, no strings attached and connect with us for free, just cruise over to sweet life, community.com. And you’ll be sent the link to register and to create your business profile and to get in there and just devour all of this crazy good free business information that is worth thousands.
And so I would love to meet with you and connect with you over there. The other cool thing we’re doing about this, and this is my last little tangent is all of the bonuses that come with our podcast episode. We are putting there in the podcast topic of our app. So no more opting in, no more having to fill out a stupid opt in form,
you know, especially when you’re already on our email list in order to download workshops and tools and templates and blueprints and worksheets, I’m just giving them to you so you can download directly to your computer and our community network. Isn’t that cool. Basically, I create what I want for myself. And so that’s what we’ve created for you. So again, you can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com
right now. Thank you guys so much for listening to the show. I always appreciate your time. I know how valuable it is and all of the show notes. One last time, including a link to join us in our new app can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com slash one 82 Awesome week. Bye for now.

Episode 181: How To Get Media Attention And Establish Yourself As An Expert – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download April’s sample 1-pager when you join the NEW (FREE) SweetLife Community Online App

Who This Episode is Great For:

Those who are experts in your space, excel in your chosen area of specialty, and you need more eyes on your business, service, or product.

Summary:

You’re really good at what you do, but oftentimes you feel like the best-kept secret. A handful of people know your worth, but not enough to get the credibility you need to reach the profit and business growth you want. 
 
In this show, you’ll learn 4 simple steps to start the process of establishing your expertise that every entrepreneur should have completed regardless of business phase or growth level. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to create your media PR plan
  2. Know what you need to have on your website to look like an expert
  3. Know the 4 simple steps you can complete this week to bring your message to the masses

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Are you guys, and welcome to episode number 181 of the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, really H and I’m super glad that you’re here, especially if you were in the place in your business where you’re really good at what you do,
but very few people know it, and we need to get you more exposure in front of the right audiences to make sure everybody knows how great you are, so that you can increase clients, increase profit and establish yourself as a leader. So that’s what we’re going to dive into in today’s show. If you’ve never listened to this podcast, before we deliver a business trainings and strategies that are proven and tested from my over 24 years of business development coaching and the expertise of our guests that come here on the show.
So everything that we give you is trusted and you can take it to the bank. And I’m so glad that you are here. All of the show notes that we have. So I’ll give you a bunch of different resources to help you implement today’s business trainings. All of the show notes can be found by visiting and Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 81. And if you stick to the end of this show,
I’m going to actually share a story with you about a technology nightmare that happened so that I can help you avoid that. I was actually thinking about doing a whole separate show regarding kind of a tech nightmare, but instead, I’m just going to do it as a little bonus. At the end of this episode, this tech nightmare actually occurred with Facebook. And it’s just a little bit of a warning that if you do business on Facebook,
even though it’s not necessarily related to the topic we’re talking about, I want to, I want to make sure I’m sharing some mornings with you from business owner to business owner regarding that platform that has been coming up recently. So that’ll be the end of this episode after the training, but let’s go ahead and dive into what we’re talking about here today. So today’s show is for those of you guys who are experts in your space,
or you super Excel at whatever your chosen area is, whatever your skill is, whether you’re a consultant or a coach or a service provider, you Excel at what you do, but you need more eyes on your business. And very few people or not enough people know how great you are because you know, if they did, then your sales would be increasing.
So I’m going to give you four steps to actually establish yourself as an expert on today’s show. So this is for those of you guys. So you’re really good at what you do, but oftentimes you feel like you’re that best kept secret. And you want to know what you can do this week. So action steps you can take right now this week to get your voice established as a leader in your space so that more people can about your company.
That’s what I’m going to go ahead and teach you on today’s show. I’m so glad that you’re here. Let’s go ahead and dive in together.<inaudible> Okay. You guys. So there are a couple of different ways we can establish you as an expert. Certainly there’s like a pay to play way. We aren’t diving into that. Everything I’m teaching you on today’s show is a business strategy that is totally free.
All right, I’m not going to say, Hey, do this and then go spend a thousand dollars. No everything I’m delivering are strategies. You can do yourself. You can delegate to a team member. You can hire a VA to do. And they’re really important things. And regardless of your business development phase. So regardless of you’re in the launch phase,
or if you’re in the growth or scale phase, all of you guys should have these things in place. So let’s go ahead and get started. And I can tell you what to do. First of all, step number one, I want you to create what is called a media kit. Now a media kit is something that really shows off how amazing you are.
A media kit is usually a PDF that’s designed with multiple pages that introduces media outlets, writers, journalists, and other people to who you are and why you’re amazing in one of the most important things you need to remember when you are creating this media kit, is that nobody is looking for you. I mean, I’m just going to keep it really real.
No media outlet is out there going, Oh my gosh, I need to find April beach. You know, no they’re looking for anybody who can create or share or speak to content that their listeners or their viewers or their readers want. So as you’re creating your media kit, this is a mistake that a lot of businesses make a lot of businesses, make it all about them.
Like I am this and I’m that. And I do all these things. And although your media kit does establish you as an expert, the most important thing to talk about in the beginning of your media kit is what does your expertise or your area of wisdom or skill do for the media outlets, users, or viewers, or listeners or readers. So what do you have that they want to share with their audience?
What are they lacking? What could they use more of? What does our audience want? So on the very first page of your media kit, you might want to include some imagery and some photography, especially if you’re like an interior designer or you’re an organizing expert, or you’re a coach of some kind, maybe some pictures that really tell a story about what you do.
And then the introductory paragraph on that first page of your media kit should be, Hey, this is what I speak to. And this is the end result that people will have when hearing my area of expertise. So I just want to really clarify that here, when I’m talking about how to go ahead through this process so that, you know, and I am going to give you some samples of some of the assets I’m telling you to create here on the show.
I’ll go ahead and make sure I’m putting those in the show notes for you. So you can see samples. So this media kit, the first page should be an introduction about who you are, what you believe a little bit of why you do what you do, cause why you do what you do sells way more than what you actually do. And of course,
speak to the end result that somebody would receive from experiencing you. And then your second page on your media kit can be something a little bit more specific, maybe a personal message about you. It might tell your story a little bit about your background and really what qualifies you to be an expert in your space. But as you’re sharing this second part of your media kit,
I also want you to make sure that you’re relatable. We want to make sure you’re extraordinary and ordinary. If you’re only extraordinary, sometimes it puts you on such a pedestal where you’re untouchable and you can’t relate to somebody’s audience. So you want to be extraordinary as you’re telling your specific story and who you are, what makes you tick maybe a little bit behind the scenes of your business and what you do.
You might want to share some pictures of getting married or your kids, or your ranch, or maybe riding horses, whatever it may be. So you are relatable and not just yeah, amazing expert in your space. And then as you go on and you create more pages in your media kit, your, some of the things that you can include, I’m going to kind of give you the gold standard here.
But I understand if you’re a new business that you might not have all of this data yet. So on the next page of your media kit, you might want to share your audience and who you currently reach. So if you have a big social media following, if you have a big Instagram following, maybe if you have great active conversations on Twitter, or if you lead a LinkedIn group,
these are all things that you want to share. So media outlets are also looking to reach a greater audience themselves. And so when you have an audience that you can share, so you have, you know, a thousand Facebook fans and two or three or 20,000 Instagram followers, make sure you include that in the numbers and the stats on an audience and reach page.
So they know the size of your audience. If you have an audience or an email list that is under 1000, I don’t recommend that you include it, but don’t be shy about sharing the fact that you host maybe smaller community groups. That’s absolutely fine. And the other thing you should include on this page three of your media kit is really who do you serve?
Who do you speak to? What percentage of men and women do you speak to? What is the age range of your ideal audience? So that media outlet understands who you serve. And then moving on down in your media kit, any other press that you’ve received, I’d like you to create a press page. So any other press that you’ve received on this page four should be logos of different outlets.
Maybe you’ve written an article that’s been published in a local magazine or a national magazine. Maybe you’ve been featured in Newsweek. Maybe you’ve been in the wall street journal include these press links here on this page, and maybe some photography or some examples of other press you’ve received. If you have them, if you don’t have them, don’t stress out about it.
That’s why you’re listening to this podcast because I’m teaching you what to do to get this kind of press. So stay tuned with me here. I know I’m giving a lot of details. The beauty of this is you can replay this as many times as you need. So page number five, you also want to dive into sharing any partnerships. You have any affiliate partnerships with any brands you’ve worked with in the past,
in any other ways that you work with different companies. So you could use this media kit. For example, if you are a maternity coach, you could use this media kit to send it to your favorite stroller brand because you want to represent them, or you want to do reviews on their products to help your audience. This is a great place in your media kit to talk about partnerships and how you partner with brands,
whether it’s, you know, Instagram, takeovers or giveaways or brand ambassador ships, you know, some of our clients also do affiliate advertising. They host events with brands and they do other great fun things. If any of that is in your business model, then you’d want to include that in the media kit because it gets that outlet or that brand’s wheels turning.
And they see you as a greater asset. Therefore they want to work with you more. And then any sort of contributions that you’ve done, expert contributions, really high level like the today show, or if you’ve, you know, partnered with, you know, Nordstrom, any of those things. We want to go ahead and enlist. These is accolades in places where people can say,
Hey, you know what? You are really a great expert at what you do. If you don’t have these, no worries. Just leave them out. Also some extra bonus pages you can include in your media kit is speaking. If you do any sort of public speaking, if you’ve spoken on any podcasts before, if you do any expert writing or any insertions or contributions to any online outlets,
then you’d want to include those in your media kit as well. And the next thing we’re going to talk about here is I’m actually going to give you a step to create. What’s called a speaker one pager, and I’m going to give you a sample of that, but here, I just want to show you that you can also include all of that in your main media kit.
And then of course your media kit needs to have your contact information, your website information, and do include a phone number. Whereas you might not include your phone number on your website. You need to make sure that media has an opportunity to email you directly or somebody who’s managing your PR and call you directly. We don’t want them hunting for information on how to communicate with you,
because if it’s takes any work for them to connect with you, they’re frankly not going to do it. Cause there are a lot of experts out there. So what we’ve just spoken about and I’ve given you numerous steps is how to actually create a media kit. Again, to summarize. This should be a PDF with a few pages, anywhere from three to eight pages that establishes your expertise,
who you serve, the audience that you serve and the things in the areas that you speak to as well as establishing why you’d be a great partner for that media outlet or that brand. Every single one of you guys. It doesn’t matter what place in business you are should have a media kit in. They’re very easy to create. You can either do it on your own in Canva,
or you can use a different sort of online template, but people are creating beautiful media kits all the time in Canva. And so that’s where we direct you to. And I’ll go ahead and make sure that there is a link to create this in Canva for you here within the show notes. And like I said, I’m going to include a template for you as well.
So that’s actually step number one. I’m giving you a lot of information on today’s show, create your whole media pack. Step number two is creating an actual what we call a speaker one pager. And I’m going to share with you my speaker one pager so that you can look at this as a template. Take it. Obviously you can’t copy it word for word,
because it’s about me and not about you, but I want you to see how they’re laid out. So the second thing you’re going to do is you’re going to create your speaker one, pager. This should be a short summarized bio, and it should include the core topics that you speak to and establish your expertise. Now, your speaker one pager is the perfect thing to send to podcast hosts like me.
When you’re pitching yourself for a show, it’s a perfect thing to include. When you’re applying to be a guest speaker, you don’t have to include your whole entire media kit. You can just have a speaker, one pager sometimes for very specific calls for speakers. They don’t want your entire media kit. They just want to know the core topics you speak to.
And that’s why I also recommend that you just have this speaker one pager it’s super simple and I will put a resource and a link. So you can see mine in the show notes for this episode. So you can cruise over to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 81. And you are welcome to download my speaker one pager, to get a sample of that.
So it can save you time. The next thing that you are going to do after you’ve created this beautiful digital media kit and this simple but powerful speaker, one pager, the next thing you’re going to is you are going to build a speaking page on your website. This can be called speaking. It can be called media. It can be called media resources.
It can be called PR and media. I don’t care what you call it, but on this page is a place where people who host events or who have a platform where they’re looking for experts. Like you can go and find all of your resources, your speaking page, or your media page should include summaries of where you’ve been seen a summary of your bio and who you speak to,
and it should include your core speaking topics. So any media outlet can immediately go and say, Hey, cool. Look at April speaks to online business development. Great. We want that on our show, or we need her to write an article on whatever this is, we’re in our podcast. So you have to be very clear. You want to outline your core speaking topics.
The short bio establishing you as an expert share any work that you’ve already done. So any social proof that you’ve spoken on stages before you can share a short video clips or photography, you can share links to podcast episodes that you might’ve been on before. And, or you can share links to articles you’ve written for media outlets or any other media exposure that you might have had.
If you haven’t done any of those things yet, don’t worry. You still need to build this speaker page so that we can start growing your list of all of these outlets and amazing places that you have been seen. So we have to start somewhere, right? We don’t want to make perfect the enemy. We have to start with what we have and go from there.
So don’t stress. If you don’t have any of that, still want you to build this page. Also on your speaking page, you are going to include your speaker one pager and make it available so people can download it right there. When they download your speaker one pager, we don’t want to have an opt in. You’re not trying to grow your list with media outlets,
make it easy for them. Give them the ability to swipe it right off your site and send it to their producer or send it to their content manager so that they can connect with you faster. And there isn’t so much red tape. And then the last thing you should have on your speaker page are headshots. Headshots of people can just download them and take them and go.
You may also include a logo to your company or any other imagery that you have a license to give that can help. That outlet actually establish you as an expert, whether they want to put your picture as an expert contributor or, you know, put your face on TV, whatever it is, you need to establish all of those in a really easy grab and go spot for them on this speaking and media page on your website.
Wow. I like me to take a deep breath cause I’ve given you guys so much information and I understand sometimes we deliver stuff. So many good things on this podcast. It’s like other podcasts would take 20 podcasts to tell you all this, but I’m giving it to you all at once. You can replay this, do replay, this, take the steps I’m giving you.
I promise you, this is how we’ve built multiple companies. And this is the exact process that I went through over 14 years ago to be featured in international media and grow my company internationally. This stuff works. It’s free, it’s sweat equity, and I want you to take it and run with it. All right. So we have talked about creating your media kit.
We’ve talked about creating a speaker one pager, and we’ve talked about building a speaking and press page on your website. The very last step I’m going to give you. I’m not going to go into super depth about it because we actually talk about it all the time. If you are an avid Sweetlife podcast listener, but this blast step is making sure that you have signed up to become a resource through help a reporter out,
help a reporter out as an online forum, where you can create a free membership where you can become a source for reporters. So anytime a reporter is looking for an expert to speak to a story they might be doing, or an article that they’re writing. They can tap into this resource and you receive an email journal every single day of all of the experts that these reporters are looking for.
You can respond, you can submit your comments. You can submit your wisdom and be seen across national and sometimes international media. So I will go ahead and include a couple of links for you in the show notes for today’s show so that you are good to go. You have everything you need, and then I’m going to actually give you even more support.
So to summarize today, we talked about how to establish yourself as an expert in your niche. And this is through PR and media, and really becoming a leader in your space. So for those of you guys had have an established business and you’re ready to scale, this is a must do on your list. If you have a new business and you’re trying to get your foot in the door,
just add this to the list of other things you need to do. This is not a must do for brand new businesses. This is a must do for those you guys who are established and you’re ready to grow and scale today, we talked about creating a full media kit and I give you samples of pages that should be included in your media kit. Today.
We talked about creating a speaker one pager, which is literally one page download PDF of who you are, why you’re awesome, and the topics you speak to. And today we also talked about creating a press and media page on your website. Now, one of the things I’m just going to answer some questions I’m guessing some of you might be having, um,
number one, if you have a company and you personally are not the brand, do you need to do this? So the answer is yes. So the leader or the CEO, or one of the business leaders of your should be visible in media should be contributing expert content. That’s only going to drive traffic back to your company and establish your company as a leader.
So if your business isn’t April beach.com, it is the corner store.com. You still need to be doing this. You still should have a press and an immediate link on your website. You still should have a media kit and you still should have a speaker. One pager. If you have multiple leaders in your company, you should have a separate media kit for each of you.
And you should have a separate speaker, one pager, as well as separate speaking topics for each one of the leaders of your company, any person that you want representing your company, every person is going to speak to a different area of expertise. And when you actually are building a speaking team, I know this is kind of next level, but we want you to actually build a speaking team,
many people that can speak to different areas of expertise within your company umbrella. So just kind of dreaming big there. If you weren’t there yet. No worries. We’re going to start here and all of the resources and show notes, the download that I’m going to give you, I’m going to give you my speaker one pagers. You can take a look at that as well as other templates can be found by visiting the show notes for today’s show@sweetlifepodcast.com
forward slash one 81. And if you love this show, please share it with your friends. We work really hard to deliver you guys, expert business trainings that other companies and coaches charge thousands for. So we appreciate, and we rely on you sharing this podcast across Facebook or Instagram. You can share it on Spotify. There’s so many different places you can share it.
And we just really appreciate you guys helping us get this show in the hands of other business owners, just like you, who appreciate trusted business trainings. So that’s the conclusion of that. Thank you so much for listening to this podcast today. I know we talked about a lot of things and I’ll make sure the resources and links for help reporter and in Canva and everything that I mentioned is in the show notes for you today.
Okay. Now I promised those of you guys that stuck around to the end that I’m going to share a little bit of a nightmare story with you about building communities and Facebook and what has happened to us just to give you a little bit of a warning. Again, I didn’t want to do a total downer podcast on this though. I probably will in the future to help other companies avoid the problems that have happened with us when we have more clarity on the situation.
But we’ve talked about this on the show before in the past, this podcast has been around for three years. We’ve talked a lot about creating community, Facebook communities, mighty host communities, LinkedIn communities. And we have always hosted Facebook communities, even though it wasn’t our favorite place. And in the last six months, my account and our, even our Facebook ads account has gotten hacked multiple times,
following all the instructions, doing everything Facebook said to do our account totally ended up getting crashed and hacked. And it was on June the 12th, that it was the most recent and Facebook completely deactivated all of our access. What this means is that they won’t speak to us. They won’t communicate with us. They’ve actually shut off the ability for us to chat with them.
They are just done with the fact that hackers have hacked in different capacities, this particular account and these particular business communities. And so I share all this with you. First of all, because since this has happened in the last couple of weeks, I’ve received a lot of messages from other business owners that have had similar problems with Facebook security. I’m not sharing this with you to say you should not have your communities and Facebook.
I am going to tell you, but again, we’ve talked about on the show before, you need to make sure please that you have a database of all of your groups, members in all of your clients backed up someplace. That is not in Facebook. You do not want Facebook to own those relationships because at any point in time, for whatever reason,
like what happened to us, they can simply shut it down without giving you any explanation. That is exactly what happened to us. Now, of course, we have all those databases. We have CRMs and email lists, and we know who’s in our community. We’ve always built relationships with our community members outside of the platform as well. But I know,
and I’ve spoken to a lot of businesses that haven’t. So I just wanted to give you a little bit of a warning that even, you know, going into election season, Facebook security is going to be ramping up, but then they’re also going to be more strict about just shutting down accounts that might have certain issues because they don’t have the capacity to deal with you.
And I want to give you a little bit of a warning that you need to make sure that you have the contact information. You have relationships someplace else on another platform, in an email marketing manager or in another capacity that is not owned by Facebook, because I don’t want you to lose the relationships in the community that you’ve worked so hard to build. So that is our nightmare story.
It’s not a new nightmare, it’s an ongoing nightmare, but it is a new development as far as complete in accessibility, not even account reviving whatsoever. It will tell you the exciting news is sometimes when we run into issues like this as business owners, it forces us to grow in other areas. And we are so excited as a company, we have invested in the building of a custom mighty host network,
which we have launched, and it’s actually launched the week before show airs. I’m super excited about it. It is an amazing community with an app that just gives you everything you need from a business standpoint, where we can deliver all of our business trainings, all of our free trains, all of our live coaching. And it’s a great place to network with other businesses,
aside from all the distractions that you would get in Facebook business and Facebook personal groups. So we’re super excited to announce that our new online community is launched and we would love for you to join it. You can cruise to sweet life, community.com. You can join it for free. All of the first members in there are foundational members and founding members, and I’m so excited to invite you guys in there free for a limited period of time to access all of our business trainings.
And you’ll be able to create a whole profile for your company in their network and actually grow your business through this community as well. So if you’re interested in checking out what we’ve done over on mighty networks and being part of our online business and entrepreneur forum, to grow your company, then cruise to sweet life, community.com and for whatever it’s worth. I just want to remind you that if you have built companies in Facebook groups and communities in those platforms,
please make sure you’re protecting your relationships. So you own them aside from those platforms. Okay. That was our nightmare story. And I hope you can learn from it. So you don’t have to go through what we have gone through the last couple weeks and months. Anyway, it’s so great to talk to you again on the show. I love that you’re here.
Thanks for sticking around to the end. I’m April beach, and I’m pleased to help you grow your business online. All of the resources for this show can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one 81 and business development coaching in my high level, masterminds can be found by visiting sweet life. coach.com. Bye for now.

Episode 180: Key Business Numbers Every Entrepreneur Should Know – with April Beach and Danielle Hayden

Danielle Hayden SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Who This Episode is Great For:

Do you know your key financial metrics? This episode is for those of you who own your own company but feel like you need a clearer understanding of your business financials and how to grow. Whether your business is established or starting from scratch, this episode will give you knowledge which equals control.

Summary:

Nobody is coming to save you. You’re the beginning and the end of making your business a success. Therefore, if you haven’t been controlling your company financials the way you should, now is the time to start. Danielle Hayden is our guest expert and financial planner for small business owners. 
 
In this show, you’ll learn how and what to pay yourself, what key numbers you need to pay attention to, how to set up your monthly financial calendar, and other key metrics you need to control as the leader of your company – even/especially if someone else is managing the money for you! 
 
If your sales aren’t quite where they should be, you need to have a plan to take control and rebound. Or… if your business is booming and flowing with cash, but you’re so busy you don’t know where the money is going, you need to take control. Regardless, knowledge and control are the keys to grow, scale, and profit and this episode will kick start that process.

Highlights:

  1. Learn how and what to pay yourself
  2. Know what key numbers you need to pay attention to
  3. Set up a monthly calendar to control the finances

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate and welcome if we don’t know each other yet my name’s April beach. I’m an online business development expert And I help companies large and small and independent entrepreneurs launch and scale your business online. So glad to talk to you again for another week here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur business podcast really appreciate you listening to the show.
I know there are tons of podcasts out there, and the fact that you keep tuning in here to get your business strategy and support really means a lot to us. And if you haven’t recently, if you are a listener on an Apple device, we would love it. If you’d cruise over to iTunes and leave us a review would definitely help other listeners find our show today on the show,
we’re talking about key business metrics that every single entrepreneur needs to know about your company. But the fact of the matter is this most business owners don’t most people go into business because they’re really good at something, or they love what they do. There are very few people that are great when it comes to the manager side of the business, the financials, and they’re graded actually performing the services.
And so as business owners, it’s common to actually struggle when we’re talking about financials and actually the numbers controlling the numbers behind your business so that your company can grow successfully. And so this particular episode is for those of you guys who feel like you need a clear understanding of your business financials and how to grow your company. So whether your business does established or you’re totally starting from scratch.
This episode is going to give you the knowledge that you need to control your numbers. So here is the reality and our guests today on the show shares this, and this is kind of a come to Jesus moment for some of you, maybe you’re new and maybe you have been in business for a long time, but nobody is coming to save you. You’re the beginning and the end of making your business a success.
And the fact of the matter really is, is that it doesn’t matter how many great people work for a company. When we have problems with leadership at the top, then the company is going to fail. And of course, I don’t know your business, and I’m not saying that you’re a terrible leader. Oh my gosh, you’re totally probably turning off my podcast right now.
What I’m saying is we all have to know our numbers and as entrepreneurs, the fact of the matter is, is it just, doesn’t usually come naturally to want to sit down and crunch all the numbers as a service provider or as a passionate entrepreneur who loves what you’re doing. And so this particular episode is going to help you have a better understanding of,
of what’s going on with the money in your company. At the end of this show, you are going to know how to pay yourself and exactly what you should be paying yourself. It’s always a question that up. And so I made sure to ask our guests that today on the show, you’re also going to know what key metrics you should be paying attention to.
And you’re going to know how to set up a monthly calendar for all of it. And here’s an extra special bonus. If you are listening to the show, it’s the third, fourth week of the month as it is when this show drops in your numbers, aren’t where they should be. Forget the whole rotavirus thing. Just generally speaking your numbers. Aren’t rebounding.
Daniel’s going to tell you what actions you can take to actually help control and rebound your numbers on the flip side of that. If your business is doing really, really well right now, you have cash flowing in that. The downfall is sometimes we get so busy and we’re making so much money. We’re not paying attention to where the money is going. So this episode is going to help both of those scenarios.
And I’m so glad to bring you this information. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight zero. All right, let’s dive in.<inaudible> Alright. You guys well, welcome back to another episode of the sweet life business podcast. I am joined today by Danielle Hayden, and I’m super excited to talk to her specifically because we’re talking about money directly about profit,
how to increase your profit and how to make sure all the works that you’re doing in your business is actually leading to the end result that you want and in that’s profit. And I do think that there are quite a few entrepreneurs, which I can’t say this is necessarily a bad thing, but they love what they do so much that the profit actually doesn’t come first.
And so years can pass by. And all of a sudden they can realize that they haven’t really controlled their financial future. So that’s why we have Danielle on the show today. Danielle is a reformed corporate CFO. Who’s on a mission to help rule breaking entrepreneurs, understand their numbers so they can gain the confidence needed to create sustainable profits. After spending over 10 years in a boardroom,
as a corporate finance officer, Danielle is now in her sweet spot as a co owner of kickstart accounting, inc, where she helps business owners with bookkeeping and financial analysis and education. And as the author of the profit planner book series, which super exciting when Danielle isn’t knee deep in the numbers, you can find her hanging out with her. Two kids are competing in the nearest Spartan race.
Danielle, I love that you’re here. Give yourself an intro. Tell everybody, tell everybody a little bit more than, than that. Yeah. I, you know, you gave it such a, an amazing intro because I think you explained all of us entrepreneurs, right? We are so passionate about what we’re doing, that we have to all remember that we’re in business And Our passion,
our mission at kickstart is to help entrepreneurs keep that front and center. We need to be turning a profit and we need to be making money so that we can use our business to support our dreams and our personal goals. Right? What do we want to be doing when we are getting up from our desk to day and how can we support that life as well?
Yeah. And you know, I know before we started recording you and I chatted a little bit and I love the, you asked me, you know, who are your listeners April? Where are they with money? And one of the things that we’ve identified as a company is, you know, we have listeners that are obviously just starting business, but a lot of our listeners have established businesses and they’re ready to grow and they’re ready to scale.
And that’s all of a sudden that time when they’re like, Oh shit, you know, I’m not really in control of the money. I haven’t really looked at the financials of what it takes in order for me to get whether it’s from, you know, a half a million dollar business to a multimillion dollar business, or, you know, for some companies it’s just crossing over like 150,000,
whatever that is, there is like this line in the sand that’s drawn. And so that’s what we’re going to talk about today, which I’m super excited about really how to get to that next level in your business, how to grow and scale your business. And so I thank you for being here. I can’t wait to hear everything that you’re going to say.
So when we’re talking about how to create this sort of freedom, you call it a financial dashboard. First of all, what is a financial dashboard? You know, you don’t hear it that term all the time in the industry. And that’s why I think that this is so important for entrepreneurs. We hear all the time, your taxes, your profit and loss statement,
your balance sheet, look at your financial statements. But how about let’s use something that as a business owner can help us really get in tune with our financials on a forward looking basis, our profit and loss and our balance sheet, those financial statements, those are all historical financial statements. So although that is really important, that dashboard that you do on a more consistent basis can really empower you day to day,
week to week to make the right business decisions on a forward looking basis. And so the dashboard includes our signature framework of pieces of information that we know is really important to your, your business. What I’ve done here is I’ve taken all of the experience I had as working as a CFO. And my job in corporate accounting was to compile all this information and arm,
our CEO and our board of directors and our management team with key pieces of information so that they can go and drive the business. And so I’m taking all that experience from that time. And I’m arming you at the entrepreneur with that same information so that you can go drive your business. Okay. I love it. So what are some of those key metrics that people should be looking at?
You know, what are the financial numbers that every single business owner should know and should be tracking? Yeah. So included in your dashboard. So I want you to pick a day of the week, so this dashboard should be done on a regular basis. So at this time in your calendar, I don’t care if it’s Monday, Wednesday, Friday, every Sunday,
I don’t care what day of the week it is. The idea is that I want you to be consistent. And so on that day, I want you to look at what are your balances? What is your cash balance, which a credit card balance. Maybe you have a line of credit credit, look at your PayPal, balances, everything. I want you to pull all of that information so that you know,
how much money do I have today and how much availability do I have to pull from my credit cards? So that’s figure number one. Okay. Number two, during the same time period that you’re working in your dashboard. I want you to look at all of the people who owe you money, the accounting world, we call it your accounts receivable. So I want you to look at your accounts receivable.
This is going to be the time that you send out collection notices, right? You have the permission I give you permission. You worked for that money. You are to collect on it, send out those collection notices, look at who owes you money, and then use that information to understand where you’re going to be for the week. If you have no,
you have, the client always pays you 15 days after the invoice is due. And that’s 15 days this week and they owe you $10,000. Then you can bet that money’s coming in and that’s going to help you make different business decisions this week. Then if you know that one client who never pays me, I’m probably not gonna get it this week. You know,
not to include that money to make business decisions this week. Got it. Alright, so that’s number two. Okay. Number three. I want you to look at who do you owe money? Right? So in the accounting world, we call this accounts payable, what credit card payments are coming up. So this includes credit card line of credit. If you have a brick and mortar,
you might have a rent payment coming up, your utilities, your cell phone bill, maybe you use zoom or Dropbox. All of these larger subscriptions that you know are coming up, maybe it’s your 10 99 or the branding and website development that you just had done. Anybody that you could owe money to that’s coming due over the next week. I want you to jot that down in this dashboard,
that’s really important because then you can see a full picture, even if you have a lot of cash in your business, but you know, you have some large payments coming up this week. You know, that you need to change the way you make this decisions this week. Maybe you can’t sign up for that new course. Maybe you can’t travel for the next conference.
Maybe you need to wait to pay that. So it can really drive how you make this decisions each week. Yeah. You know, and about that, I know a lot of online businesses, those that don’t have brick and mortar stores and my business included in that there are a lot of software expenses. And I remember it was three years ago. All of a sudden I was,
I was sitting there and I actually realized I had never totaled the amount unless I was looking at like a profit and loss. In hindsight, like you were saying, I never really thought about how much money we were spending on software. And I think we had a really like 35 different charges coming in. Some were only five bucks. Some were 55,
some were 500. And all of a sudden I’m like, Oh my gosh, you know, this is an absolute drain. It’s a huge hole leaving my business that I just considered a necessary evil. And I think a lot of online businesses are like racking up the software expenses too. Yeah. So I love that you said this and just keeping track of what’s coming in each week and making sure that honestly,
that we aren’t frivolously spending on something we don’t need to, but you know, even that dollar 99, Google drive storage, all of these little numbers add up and definitely take away from the province. So super smart. And then the last figure I want you to calculate on the dashboard is your sales. The reason I want you to look at this every week and compare it to two numbers,
compare to what you did last month, what you did last year and what was your goal, right? What was your budget? What was your goal? And the reason I want you to compare it to those three is because it’s second week of the month. And I’m way behind what I did last month, or I’m way behind what I did last quarter,
or I’m way behind my goal. I need to really focus my energy and my activities and my to do list over the next two weeks to really be income generating activities. Are there any deals that I can close? Is there any thing that I can build out for customers? Maybe I have an outstanding project that can be build out, you know, if you’re falling short of last month,
is there anybody who actually didn’t get their bill this month? Right? So maybe there was a billing error. So I would say your, your financials are trying to tell you a story, read the story, right? So I’m two, three weeks into the month and I’m not where I need to be. I need to listen to that story and I need to change my activities for the rest of the month.
Totally makes sense. Totally makes sense. Okay. I have questions. Yeah. Is there a certain profit margin benchmark that accompany would know that they need to be at before investing in future growth? Did that make sense in the way asset? Is there a certain amount of like you’re, you’re hitting these profit margins and now you are in a place. Is there a healthy percentage of profit that would tell a business it’s like maybe a number percentage and indicator that would tell a business,
Hey, listen, you really now at this point in time, you’ve sustained this profit. You’ve grown consistently. Now it’s a healthy time to reinvest in scale more. Yeah, you did ask the question, so, okay. This is the worst answer I can possibly give you. Oh wait, bring it on. Okay. That’s basically, I can’t tell you April,
cause I don’t see your numbers. You know, I always tell people a health, a healthy profit margin is 30%. I could give you that answer 30%, but there’s more to that, right? So it depends on what your personal situation is. It depends on where you’ve already been at in your business. So maybe this is your third year in business.
And the first year and a half was really tough. And you took out a lot of debt in your business. And although you’re starting to turn a profit, you’re carrying on a lot of debt with you. And so with that person, I might say, it’s probably more important for you to restructure that debt before you go and invest more money into your business.
Maybe you’re somebody who you don’t have to take as much money to support your personal obligation. And therefore you have the opportunity to be able to invest bigger in your business right now. And lastly, it depends on what your goals are. I always tell people, you need to sit back and it sounds so cliche and so entrepreneurial, you know, there’s so many entrepreneur gurus who are telling you to set goals,
but I want you to do it a little bit differently. I want you to set financial goals. We had a client last year, who her goal was to grow her top line revenue, no matter what the cost, she was not taking a dollar from her business. She was growing revenue. And so she was doing some Facebook advertising. She had a budget for that.
She was going to conferences. We had set up a budget for her to go to for conferences. She was doing a ton of in person networking throughout the year. And so when we’ve sent her her financial statements and we kept on saying, Hey, although you are not profitable the day we know that this is aligning with your goal, right? And as we came into 2020 really started to see her revenue sore and was an amazing story to tell,
right? Because she really made that investment throughout the year. We saw that return and she said, okay, 2020 is my year to make money for me. Good for her. I want to go on vacation. I want to pay back me. And so now this year, when we see her expenses start to creep up because she gets excited and wants to go buy the next core.
So she still wants to go, you know, we are able to say, Hey, your goal is to be profitable this year. So we need to keep these expenses in line. Is this something that we really need to do in order to sustain revenue? Or can we do without this expense this year? Mm, super great. I love that story.
Okay. So this is actually a good segue into what about self pay? There are a lot of business owners that still, I mean, they could have been in business for seven, 10 years that still aren’t paying themselves. What does that look like to pay yourself? What is that frequency? You know, what are the benchmarks that our listeners right now should say,
Hey man, you know, I haven’t really pulled a dime unless it was just maybe a couple of dollars here, a couple of dollars there. Yeah. So first of all, no shame we have had clients come to us and every spectrum of this story. And the first thing I’ll say is just kind of, don’t give yourself a hard time about it,
right? It, it has happened too many opera entrepreneurs. I think it’s time to break that mold though. So frequency, I would say at least once a month, if you could do it weekly, when you’re doing that dashboard, you can pay yourself weekly, but let’s say you’re somebody who you haven’t done that type of dashboard yet. You’re only looking at your financials on a monthly or quarterly basis.
When you look at that information, that would be the time to get yourself paid. But if you’re doing that dashboard, you have a little bit more opportunity to get yourself paid more frequently. Another thing I’ll say, you know, a lot of entrepreneurs will come to us. Our clients will say, Hey, look, you know, what do I pay myself?
How do I even know what the right number? I feel like, um, you know, I take too much, I’m robbing my business, take enough. I’m frustrated with my business that it’s not supporting the life I want. So the goal is to find a happy medium. And here’s the exercise that I suggest for every business owner to do, take your cash balances in the bank today.
And I want you to subtract between one and three months worth of operating expenses. So go pull out your piano, but take that profit loss statement, take out any of the outliers. So maybe you had a $4,000 legal bill last month or $2,000 branding bill, the things that aren’t going to continuously happen. Okay. So there are those that you can do this in Excel,
just prospects, right? Maybe any payments to yourself, you know, clear those out. Maybe you let go of your contract or last month clear that. So just want you to have a true average of your monthly operating expenses. And you want to have between one and three months. So take beginning cash minus your one to three months worth of savings.
And then that is your true cash balance. That’s what you can take from your business, unless you know, of a big investment coming in the next, you know, month or so. And maybe you subtract that out as well. Yeah. Wow. That’s awesome. And it’s so helpful and yeah, and I love that you said that too. There’s no shame in this because so many businesses just want to,
so many entrepreneurs want to make their business work and they’re just willing to do everything they can, which is, that’s what it takes to have a successful business, but we have to pay ourselves. And it’s something that I struggled with for years. I didn’t start paying myself. I think I was in business for about nine years before I ever started paying myself.
I remember when I first started doing that, did it felt like I was robbing from I’m like, why wouldn’t I leave it in there? You know, I really don’t need this right now. Why would I leave it in the company? But there was something about as a woman that owned two businesses, a hundred percent by myself, there was something about that just for me about that power and authority.
And maybe it’s just the way I am that I was pulling my own money out of that. That just really made me feel good. And I remember it was like a turning point psychologically for me that even I took my businesses even more seriously, if that’s even a something that I could have done, when I really started to pay myself, it was a,
it was a big shift in my mindset about that. And that was a big deal for me. It’s a huge step. I can’t tell you how many times client will come to us. And they’re frustrated because they’re not paying that. It hurts them in their other relationships. Right? So think about your husband or wife, who you’re spending a lot of time in the business.
And if you’re not taking any of that home to help support your family, it can hurt your other relationships and how they’re supporting you in your business. And so we just really have watched people transform from cutting resentful towards their business. So really being able to embrace and grow their business when they start to pay themselves. So if you haven’t taken a paycheck at no shame,
I’ll just sit down, do the dashboard, put it in your calendar and do that dashboard. I gave you the calculator. I want you to take a paycheck as of next month. Yeah, for sure. Even if it’s like a hundred bucks. Yeah. Okay. Danielle, I appreciate all these numbers so much. And for you being on the show to wrap it up,
talk to us about why it’s so important for entrepreneurs to actually own their own success. Nobody’s coming to save you, right? There’s nobody who’s going to come in and wave a magic wand and say, you deserve it. You worked hard enough done give you the magic beat. You know, it’s time for all entrepreneurs step up. And when you can start to really look at your financials,
look at your dashboards are taking home a paycheck. All of those things are really action steps to helping you step into your success. As a business owner, there are all the steps that you need to start to grow and play bigger. And I promise you until you start to have that confidence, there’s always going to be something holding you back. When we work with clients and see them literally morph into this transformation from going confused and lost.
And I’m not sure if I can buy this, I’m not sure if I can pay myself. And then once you start seeing your financials and once you start setting goals, and then once you start paying yourself, these are all building blocks. And then all of a sudden you wake up and you feel confident and you’re like, I’m ready to make this business,
the success that I knew it was supposed to be. Right. Yeah. I love that. Thank you so much for being on the show for your wisdom and your expertise and sharing it with our listeners and sharing it with me. How can people find and talk to us about your books that you’re writing? So are avid readers out there that love to read,
know how to tap into more of you? Yeah. So you can yeah. Find me at profit planner, bookkeeping.com/sweetlife. You can read more about our services and the books. You know, this is where we took our signature framework that we were using with our clients. And we put pen to paper and we really outlined a workbook for entrepreneurs to be able to use,
to set up and then analyze their financials. We see so many business owners who say this whole accounting thing, it’s kind of a big blur. There’s so much to it. I don’t even know where to start. Right. It’s like going on a diet or running a marathon. So what we did was we took all the information. And so let’s break this down.
It’s a 12 week book and every week we give you, you know, two to four pages worth of accounting education, we just set up the foundation for that week. And then we give you one action step per day. So there’s one activity they set up 15 minutes in the morning is your CEO time do that action step. And then you start to feel,
build your confidence. And by the time you’re done with the 12 weeks, you’re like, wow, I’ve got my business financials under control. I feel like a badass. Wow. How powerful. That’s so horrible. I love that. Especially that it’s your signature framework with all your experience and how you’re used to getting entrepreneurs results and small businesses results. So we love that.
So we’ll make sure as well that a link to where people can grab that is in the show notes for this episode. Or you guys can just cruise directly over to profit planner, bookkeeping.com forward slash Sweetlife. Is that correct? That’s it. Yep. Awesome. Thanks so much for your time. I loved having you on the show. It was great to meet you.
Yeah. So glad to be here. And as question comes in, I will, uh, Washington, social media and whatnot. I’m happy to keep the conversation going. Awesome. Me too. Appreciate it. Thanks. Thank you.<inaudible> I’m glad you made it to the end. I hope you found this show incredibly informative. We strive to give you business development,
coaching and strategies that other companies charge you thousands of dollars for. We appreciate you being here, listening to the show and sharing it with your friends tune in next week. For another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. Bye for now.

Episode 179: Email Marketing Software Every Company Should Have – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join April’s group business coaching program

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for business owners struggling to understand how to use email marketing, when to use email marketing and why to use email marketing.  This is a SweetLife Business Foundations show and we’re covering important foundations every business should have when it comes to growth.

Summary:

Many businesses are not using email marketing correctly. Regardless if your business is local or online, email marketing is a must. If you are struggling to understand how to use email marketing to connect with your clients, increase your sales, and the difference between email marketing options this show is for you. You’ll know the difference between email managers and clearly understand your software needs to move forward. 

Highlights:

  1. The difference between your business email and your email marketing manager
  2. Business email set up and use
  3. Marketing email set up and use 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode 179 of the sweet life business podcast. I’m April beach, your host Development mentor, and strategist. And today it’s just me and you today.
We’re diving into what I would call a sweet life business foundation show. And I’m going to tell you the background as to why I chose to deliver this training. I can actually share with you why this training was important to deliver in just a second, but before we get started, let’s make sure you are in the right place. Today’s show is for business owners that are struggling to understand how to use email marketing,
when to use email marketing and why you should even be using email marketing at all. Now, this isn’t something that is only for new businesses. As a matter of fact, our company helps more established companies that have been around forever, but just haven’t really caught up to how you can grow your business through email marketing and online business development, yet more than anybody else with this problem,
there are more established businesses in the marketplace today, both in person and local businesses and online businesses that are either not using email marketing at all or using it totally incorrectly. So in this show, we’re going to make sure you know how to use email marketing correctly. So regardless of your local or online email marketing is a must and you’re going to fully see and understand that by the end of this episode,
if you’re struggling to understand how to use email marketing, to connect with your clients, increase your sales, and the difference between all the different kinds of email marketing you can do, then this show is for you. And at the end of this show, you’re going to know the difference between your business email and an email marketing manager. You’re going to know how to set up your business email and what to use that email option four.
And you’re going to know how to set up your business, email marketing manager and when, and how to use that option to grow your business. So we’re covering a lot today, but this is a foundational training. It doesn’t mean your businesses has to be new. Like I said, this could be for established businesses and actually more often, that is the case of the companies that are coming to us that need email marketing in place.
So what really actually made me decide that this was an important episode to do because frankly, having my sleeves rolled up in business for so long, sometimes these foundational trainings, they’re just kind of the back of my hand, just like, I’m sure you’re so close to your area of expertise, those basic questions. Sometimes you overlook because you know them so well.
You just automatically think that everybody else knows and understands them. And so here’s a little background story. I was teaching a group masterclass of businesses that I consult internationally yesterday. And during this class we had open questions and answers and one person asked a question. It was a very basic question about email marketing and really the whole rest of this business group coaching session turned this pivot to be all about email setup,
email marketing managers, and a lot of things that people were struggling with with it wasn’t necessarily the content that I had planned to teach as far as business development strategy, but it made me realize how important this topic is and how many companies are missing it. And then in my private Facebook group, this testimony from yesterday’s training came along and I’m just going to read it to you.
This is from a client of mine. I’m not going to mention her name, but if this testimony resonates with you, if you want to feel this way, then this podcast is definitely a good episode for you to stay tuned into. So this is what my client posted. She said for many years, one of the things that held me back, or to be brutally honest,
shut me down entirely is tech and the daunting tasks of building a landing page and opt in whatever hiring someone is not an option for me. And I prefer to learn it just now, as soon as I got off this group training call, I signed up for the software that I’m going to tell you in today’s episode, I was just blown away after watching the tutorial and how to create a simple opt in and how to connect my email responses,
et cetera, after so long filling step, this process brought tears to my eyes and I finally broke through, excuse the tears, but I’m so happy and I feel so much better now. So that was a testimony from one of my clients based on the business coaching session we had yesterday about this topic. And it really had me thinking that this is an important topic,
and I apologize to you as it foundational and advanced business training podcast. If I have skipped over this, I know we recreated a lot of episodes in the beginning. I think episodes number 12, 13, and 14 were all about how to set up your email marketing manager and what is a list and how to use this. But it’s episode number 179.
So years later, I haven’t covered this in a long time. And for that, please forgive me. And I apologize and let’s go ahead and dive into today’s training. All the show notes, all the resources I’m going to share with you can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one seven, nine<inaudible>. Okay. First things first, there are two types of email platforms that you should have for your business.
You should have your personal business email, and you should have a separate email marketing manager, totally separate from each other. They are not the same thing. And I think this is where some of the confusion comes in. So let me break down the difference. The personal business email is something. For example, like mine is april@sweetlifeco.com. That’s my personal business email.
It’s where I email people. One-on-one maybe I might send an email to copy and CC some people at the most five, that would actually be a very large group to send a very personal email to my email marketing manager is the software that it holds my list of leads, clients and partners in my email marketing manager is the one that sends out weekly. Sometimes biweekly broadcast to everybody on my list.
I cannot do that nor do I want to do that from my personal business email, that needs to be done separately through eight email marketing manager. So that is a very basic foundational difference. And I was shocked again on this training yesterday and really overlooked how many businesses didn’t understand the difference between those foundations. So let’s go ahead and dive a little bit deeper into each one.
So your business email, this is for sure. Number one, rule number one has to be, and I don’t care if I’m not supposed to say has to be on the show. You guys know me. I’m always going to just lay it out there. The way it is. It has to be at your domain name. It can be cindy@theworld.com.
It can be april@sweetlifepodcast.com. It is never going to be april@gmail.com. You should never for professional branding purposes, have your business email, not in end in your custom URL domain. If you take nothing away from this show, except for this one thing, I want you to run as fast as you can. And I want you to customize your email so that it is your first name at your URL at your company domain name,
no matter what, please do not send anybody in email from podcast@gmaildotcomoryourbusinessnameburstatyahoo.com. It is incredibly unprofessional and it will immediately disqualify you. And frankly, it’ll make your brand look like shit. And so I don’t want that to happen to you. That’s why you’re here. And so it’s my job to tell you to fix that first. Now let’s talk about how to fix that.
We recommend as a company using G suite Gmail for business, there are a lot of different options out there that you can use. G suite does cost right now. Currently I think I pay $5 per month per customer email that I have, but it’s really important because accessing G suite as a business owner allows me to do a couple of things. Number one,
it allows me to accomplish that professional email that I want and need to have for my brand. So again, mine, and you’re welcome to shoot me an email. If you want. Mine is april@sweetlifeco.com, but then I also am able to create custom email addresses for my team. So I have my assistant, I have my editor, I have my marketing manager.
I have my podcast, guest relations person. They all have their own separate email addresses. And all of them are@sweetlifeco.com. It has the same ending having a G suite account enables me to do that. Now I’ve put some links in the show notes for you. You can go and create your own G suite business email right now for five bucks in email address.
And it will customize your email for you. G suite will also give you access to tons of other software options like spreadsheets and different advanced business bundle options that are really important to have to grow your company and to manage your communications. So we love G suite and no I’m not making any money. I’m telling you to go there. I’m telling you to go there cause it’s easy and it’s cheap and it’ll make you look good.
The second thing I want you to know about this business email is this is where, like I said, previously, you email people one-to-one. So if I’m going to shoot an email over to my business partners at this other company, it’s coming from me personally, and it’s coming out of my G suite business email. Here is a tip. As you’re setting this up,
I want you to do a couple of things. Number one, I want you to customize your signature line within this email, in my signature line, under my personal email, I have my logo. I have links to where people can listen to the podcast. I have my title and I have some other quick action things like my phone number is in there as well.
This isn’t something that I’m just going to email everybody in the world, but these specific people, I want them to know how to get in touch with me. Hence sending them a direct personal email. These are people I want to work with people whose business I want to have and people I want to help and serve and support. So it’s important that they know how to connect with me.
And I make sure that my signature is set up. So every single email I send, whether it’s from my mobile phone or whether it’s from my desktop or my iPad is all looking really spiffy and professional and giving people what they want and need from me now, really super expert tip, if you are just a solo entrepreneur. So if there’s only one of you and you don’t want to manage all the emails yourself in your personal email inbox,
then I actually recommend you create two different emails. And one of them could be your first name at your company URL. And the second one is something like hello or support or info or help or welcome, create a separate catch, all email for all of those other emails that are going to be inbound emails. But frankly, they’re just, you’re not really sure you want to give those inbound emails access to your personal business inbox.
So that means you would connect two separate business emails, one for you personally. And one is a catchall for all the other inquiries, and you should still have that. If you have a team in our company, we have a catchall email. We have hello, it’s Sweetlife co.com. And then we have very specific email addresses for different functions in different divisions within our business.
Like I said, for example, podcast@sweetlifeco.com is where people pitch us to be a guest on this show. I want those emails only landing in one inbox because frankly, I personally hate reading emails. I would rather do anything else all day long than sit in my inbox. So we actually create many different emails. So when I’m looking for something specific, I don’t have to dig it all out of one whole email.
I can go just to the podcast@sweetlifecode.com, email inbox, and find exactly what I’m looking for as an example. So that is the first kind of business email that every single business should have out the gate. Like I said, don’t be that person that has an at Gmail or at Yahoo or heaven forbid had AOL. If you have an at AOL, indeed,
then you haven’t listened to any of these podcast episodes. And I just don’t even know what to say to you at this point in time. But I actually did get an email from somebody that was at AOL and I’m not even sure how technically that is even possible anymore, but I did receive one a couple of months ago. All right. So that is the first type of business email manager you need.
You’re just going to use it to email people one on one, and to receive inbound emails. The second type of email manager you should have is what I call an email marketing manager. An email marketing manager is what manages your outbound communications with either your entire list of leads. So all of the people in your database, or with only a certain section or a certain subset of people on your list.
So an example of this is let’s just go back to that same case study. I shared about my international group of entrepreneurs that I coach on Mondays. I want to, for example, send them an email saying, Hey, don’t forget, meet me for a group coaching session register here. I am not sitting down to write individually emails to go out to each one of those people.
No, I’m writing one email and I’m sending it to only the people who are in that group business mastermind. So my email marketing manager is capable of segmenting, who I want those emails to go to and managing the outbound emails for me, my personal business, Gmail, number one at a one at doing that. Number two. If I did that out of my personal business,
Gmail, I would probably be flagged for spam email marketing managers are strategically developed so that they are compliant and you are not spamming people. That’s why it’s incredibly important to have one. As we talked about here, a lot on the show, we’re always talking about grow your list, grow your list. And frankly, I realized that there are many of you guys that don’t even know what the hell that means.
That’s fine. And don’t, let’s talk about that as it relates to email marketing manager. So your list is a list of names and email addresses that are either leads for your business partners, for your business clients, for your business, or they fall into another miscellaneous category. But where do you grow your list? Where do you collect this database? In a lot of companies,
we call this a CRM. It’s a client relationship management software, but there are so many businesses that don’t need a full fledged CRM. A lot of CRMs managed billing and communications back and forth and workflows and all of these bells and whistles that frankly, most businesses don’t meet. So that’s when we scale back from a full fledged CRM, and you only need an email marketing manager to manage your list,
segment your list, and continue to collect names and email addresses to add to your list. That’s what an email marketing manager does. And in this particular episode, we aren’t talking about the marketing side of how to gather those names, how to increase the leads to land on this list. I’m simply talking about the software and where to put this content, where to put this information in your client database.
So now let’s chat a little bit deeper about what else your email marketing manager can and will do for you. That’s incredibly important. And you must have, again, doesn’t matter if you are a local business, if you’re a brick and mortar business, if you’re an online business, you need to be using email marketing in order to grow and connect with your audience.
Because here is the goal. Here is the magic. An email marketing manager also utilizes artificial intelligence. So we utilize AI in the form of automation to connect, connecting, communicate with the people in your database automatically without you having to be there sitting down at your little iPad when you would rather be at the beach or wherever and typing out emails, having an email marketing manager sets up automation.
So what we mean by that is when somebody clicks a certain place on your website, or when somebody clicks a link in one of the outbound emails that you send a correct email marketing software will identify that they’ve clicked a certain link or taken a certain action, and it will do a number of things. It could either add a tag to that individual person letting you know that that person is interested in the certain link or whatever it was that they clicked on.
It will send that person an automatic email saying, Hey, we just noticed that you visited our scheduling page, but maybe you didn’t actually schedule with us. How can we help you get on our calendar so that we can serve you better? These are the crazy, amazing things that only an email marketing manager can do for you, that you can’t do yourself.
At least after a certain point, if you ever want to grow a profitable business, you are way too busy serving your clients and dreaming up awesome things. And not some ways to grow your business, connecting with partners out there, shaking hands and kissing babies. You’re not going to be sitting in there typing these damn emails, one for one. And it’s really important that you’re utilizing the software that we have available to us as business owners,
to create automation, which is going to build a deeper relationship with your clients. It’s preprogrammed. It utilizes artificial intelligence and you aren’t even there, but they feel like just send them a personal email. That is not something that your individual business email through G suite is capable of doing. So to summarize today, we talked about two different email marketing platforms that every business needs.
We talked about the fact that you need your personal business email in it’s your name or whatever word you can do, your first name and you know, like your first initial or whatever combination you want to do at your custom business domain or URL. And then we talked about having a separate email marketing manager that manages your database. It’s not a full fledged client relationship management software.
So you’re not diving into investing thousands of dollars sometimes into something like Salesforce, or even hundreds of dollars a month into something like 17 hats or even cheaper dub Sato. There are so many different software out there that they’re incredible. And if you were my client and we sat here face to face and I heard your business and what you need, I might actually recommend that.
But on today’s show, we’re just talking about basic email marketing in the that you can leverage it right now and you should be leveraging it right now without even having all the bells and whistles in your business. And the number one email marketing manager that we currently are turning our clients to granted. This could change a year from now. So don’t come hunt me down if I’ve found a better one.
But as of right now, the best email marketing manager that we have, that we love to recommend that super easy to use is called convert kit. We also have numerous clients that use active campaign and Ontraport. And I’m going to go ahead and put links to all of these in the show notes with free trials for you. And there are numerous different email marketing platforms that many of our clients use.
A lot of our clients love MailChimp. We, and I’ll keep it honest here on the show. We do not believe MailChimp is a good option for new businesses. It’s actually confusing for more, most businesses that we find based on the way that they have engineered the growth of their platform. So it’s just, isn’t a manager that we recommend currently, but I’m going to go ahead input all of the links.
Like I said, in the show notes for today’s show, I hope this helped clarify some business foundations. Again, I don’t care if you’re a new business and established business. I don’t care if you are a local business or a restaurant or a salon or a spa or a hotel. I don’t care if you’re a marketing manager or a speaker or an author,
you should be utilizing email marketing to connect with your audience, both from a personal business side and from an outbound route marketing and messaging through an email marketing manager. And I hope this show cleared up any confusion that you might have had about this, just like it did for my client and many on yesterday’s business development call. And if you have any questions about this at all,
you want to jam on email marketing managers, or maybe this actually opened up a whole entire bucket of new questions for you over and connect with me in my free Facebook community and tagged me in any questions you have. I’m always in there supporting businesses it’s totally free, and you can join that community by going to sweet life community.com and all of the show notes that I mentioned can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one seven nine. Alright, have an awesome week. I’ll talk to you.

Episode 178: How To Use LinkedIn To Grow Your Business Organically – April Beach and Judi Fox

Judi Fox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for anyone trying to grow their LinkedIn connections to intentionally grow your business (new or seasoned) to connect with the right people and build professional relationships. 

Summary:

LinkedIn is the best B2B social platform that exists. However, few people know how to use it, what to post, or what strategy to follow to make the right-profitable connections. In this show, Judy Fox, LinkedIn Expert, shares a simple and powerful strategy to accept the right connections and her 3 part system on the best content to share. 
 
At the end of this show, you will know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and what to post, when. 

Highlights:

  1. Have a simple LinkedIn connection strategy
  2. Know the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn
  3. Understand how to organically grow engagement with the right people at no cost

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to episode number 178 of the sweet life business podcast. My name is April beach. We have not met before. I teach Me as an entrepreneur is to develop programs,
courses, online business options, to grow and scale your business faster. So glad to connect with you here and everything we talk about is delivering a business strategy or a marketing strategy to help you achieve the goal of business growth, which leads to lifestyle, freedom to create the life you really want with your business growth profits. Today on the show, we are talking to those of you guys who are interested in growing your LinkedIn profile.
So LinkedIn it’s been around forever. You and I both know that, but very few people know how to use LinkedIn. And a lot of people still believe that LinkedIn is just a place to pop up your old resume and leave it there. And as a matter of fact, it’s changed so much in the last couple of years that this will be the fifth,
maybe even the six different podcast episode that we have recorded about LinkedIn, because I really feel like it’s an important platform for you to grow your personal brand or your company brand and for you to connect with your ideal clients and increase your sales. But the truth of the matter is, is I don’t believe that my company has been using LinkedIn as well as we could.
As a matter of fact, if I had to rate the way I have used LinkedIn on a scale of one to 10, it would probably be a four and that’s not good. That’s not passable for profitable business. And so today’s guest, I actually hunted her down and so she could share resources and strategies to help all of us increase our sales and the right connections on LinkedIn.
So this episode is for those of you guys who are trying to grow your LinkedIn connections, intentionally want to grow your business, whether you’re a new business or an established business, and you don’t know how to do it on LinkedIn, the last two episodes, if you were tuning into the show one 77 and when 76, my friend AIJ Wilcox was on the show and he was talking to us about how to grow your business on LinkedIn,
by paid advertisement. But this episode is all about how to organically grow your business on LinkedIn, without spending a dime to we’re going to dive in with today’s guest at the end of the show, you’ll know what to do with your LinkedIn connections, how to increase the visibility of your content and you’ll know what to post. And when, so this show is going to help you have a simple LinkedIn content strategy,
no, the types of content you should be posting on LinkedIn and understand how to use them organically to increase your engagement and connect with the right people without spending a dime. So excited to dive into this show with Judy Fox and with you. So let’s go and do it.<inaudible> All right, you guys are welcome back to another episode of this sweet life business podcast.
I am here with duty Fox. And let me tell you a little bit of the background story of how Judy got here. First of all, you guys I’ve been on LinkedIn forever, as long as I think that you can have been on LinkedIn, but I’ve never really figured out how to use it, how to leverage it for my business. And I knew that there was some strategy that I was missing.
We know video is King meat. We actually have done LinkedIn shows two years ago, but it still didn’t connect in my own brain. And regardless of what my team says and tell something connects in my own mind, it’s just honestly, just not going to happen. And so I’m sitting on like 120 LinkedIn invitations, and I knew there was some strategy that somebody out there knew in order to help me connect on a deeper level with the right people on LinkedIn.
And so I went on a hunt and I think it was in one of my Facebook communities I posted or somebody else’s community. I posted other, I said, I need a LinkedIn connection expert. I want them on my podcast. I need it for myself, selfishly and personally. And I know that all my clients need it and millions of other business owners and professionals need it as well.
So we are joined today by Judy Fox. And let me just read her bio and then I’m going to turn it over to her. She’s super impressive. So we’re both gonna have a great time today and we hope you guys do too. All right. Judy Fox hit 3 million views in 2018 on LinkedIn and has been featured in inc com as a topic. My video marketer and speaker at vid summit,
social media week, video marketing world broadcast your authority, authentic leadership summit, and more or less with over 18 years of experience in business development and sales, Judy Fox is a superpower positioning clients online and his authority as an authority in their space, building highly engaged audiences and getting more inbound opportunities. Now, Judy, I want you to introduce yourself and as you do it,
instead of me reading this, cause sometimes that’s just weird. Yeah, it does. But you have something here. Call them LinkedIn business accelerator. Talk about that. And then we’re going to dive into a ton of different LinkedIn strategies for those of you that are entrepreneurs and business owners here on the show. But first of all, what is, is business accelerator?
Because the fact that there is even a LinkedIn business accelerator tells me and many of our listeners that we’re missing the boat somewhere on making more money by leveraging LinkedIn. Yes. Oh my gosh. So I can’t even express how excited I am by the LinkedIn business accelerator because people who implement this literally hit millions of views either in weeks to months. And they are being asked to get on radio shows,
asked for podcasts. I have one client literally got shared by Arianna Huffington who has 9 million followers on LinkedIn. So there are people on LinkedIn who are getting access and getting featured in Forbes. And I just had another client get featured in BBC news. So, I mean, I could go down the rabbit hole for LinkedIn business accelerator, but the point of it is it’s a 90 day program.
It’s a container of leveraging the, what you really need to new do, and not all the things you need to do. What can you do in five days? And I will show you that it will grow your profile views by 2000%. I’ve had some clients literally get 200000% increases because it is just putting the gas pedal down on actually the things that work for what you do in person,
how to show up online and do the same thing. And it’s like a translator. Okay. First of all, we’ll put all of the links to the show notes. So you can find Judy and all of this information in the show notes for this week’s episode, which is number 178. So a couple of things we’re going to cover today. And I like most people have numerous questions about,
well, one of the things that I love about LinkedIn is it’s really powerful for companies like mine, which is strictly. And we just had Aja on the show, you know, AIG and Aja. And I jammed for a couple of episodes on paid reach through LinkedIn. Then he has his own take on that because that’s his area of expertise. But first of all,
what type of businesses do you think should be active on LinkedIn right now? Oh my gosh. So this goes back to my human. I even put this in my profile. I do human to human marketing. So as I mentioned, I have 18 years experience and I started my career as a chemical engineer. I then moved my way up. The corporate ladder in a fortune 500 company was being groomed and trained for the C suite and throughout that entire process.
And especially at some points in my career, being that business development, the seller, the Dewar role throughout all these corporate experiences that I’ve had. And the biggest takeaway is I am a human gatekeeper. I’m still a human being who was the gatekeeper to sometimes millions and millions of dollars at these corporate offices, corporate contracts, proposals requests for proposals. So all of these processes,
I kept saying to myself, I’m being sold to I’m selling other people like it’s this whole circle. And I kept asking myself, I’m just another human being that’s in that gatekeeper position. So I come to a conclusion that if you are human being and you are wanting to amplify the message that comes out beyond yourself. So say for example, we are attracted to other human beings and that’s why we have these influencers that we hire and we pay good money for.
And they advertise our brand. Will, can you imagine having your entire company filled with influential people who are leaders of your company, they can be that way on LinkedIn. And it’s a very natural space for them to be that way on LinkedIn. So it’s almost like we’re just amplifying the message of humans. And that’s why I say almost anyone can be on LinkedIn.
I know that sounds really blunt, but I’ve seen artists who are doing amazing. There’s a woman named Casey who shows her artwork and she is getting a hundred thousand views sometimes on her artwork. And she’s selling out in minutes because she’s visible. We know she exists and we can grab onto her content. And, and we can only imagine how many people are online.
Every single need that you have as a human is still a part of you. When you go to work, sometimes you’re willing to pay even more. Wow. Cause you want it done for you. You want that painting that she put out there because it looks amazing. Maybe it’s great for your corporate office and you want to buy it. Maybe it’s great for your background of your podcast or your video and you want to buy it.
Do you see what I mean? Like the corporate and professional world, I feel like it’s all merged now. I love that example. And I love that case study. I actually have a good close friend of ours will day it’s real day art it’s on LinkedIn and in his paintings, I can’t even venture to say what some of his opinions began at,
but he is on LinkedIn. He does really well. And I feel like I’ve seen that expansion, especially in the last two years where also being a mother and working from home forever. I’m seeing also things that I would never expect to see, but I think I personally pick up on it, just who I am as a human being, things about breastfeeding or things about self care or things that aren’t so much lack and white.
This is business things that don’t appear to be, as you were saying, corporate black and white content that they’re silent. And The only reason I have to say something so quickly is because for how many years were we told what is considered corporate, but it’s also considered corporate because they didn’t necessarily have as a male dominated industry that I’ve been in, in the engineering world.
Those conversations wouldn’t have existed anyways. So I am the leader that I want to be in the world and the leader that I want to be allows conversations for both male and female things that we all face. And just because men aren’t breastfeeding in the workplace, it doesn’t delete that. That is still a professional conversation that needs to happen because it’s work related to talk about raising children.
And it’s not just a female thing. It’s men and women raising children. And I, I challenged, like I love Sarah Blakely’s LinkedIn profile. If you go to her profile at the bottom of her about section, which is making it very clear that I memorize people’s about sections. She actually says my goal and mission in life is to balance the masculine and feminine energies Because that Is a powerful mission and goal.
And I, I love, I love following her. She was just on a LinkedIn live on LinkedIn. She did it from her RV where she’s on the road with her husband and she is still running her company and doing all the things, but showing up as a parent, showing up as we’re parents and all parental conversations matter, They do, especially.
Yeah, that’d be a rant, especially now in the last, you know, in the last three months. And I’m actually looking forward to the way that business models are going to change that it is much more holistically incorporating our role as parents, as well as leaders and executives, business owners and everything else. So I’d love that. Okay. Yeah.
You and I could jam on that all day, right? Here’s my primary question. We talked about it a bit and started before we started recording. The first strategy I would love for you to share is the answer to the question. What the heck do I do with all of these crazy amount of LinkedIn invitations? I know there’s a strategy behind it and for our listeners,
it just randomly sure. I’ll accept your invitation. It’s just random. Just click button, easy to accept. There is a deeper business relationship low that we need to mind. And I know that there is, but personally in my business, I do not have a strategy to do that. And that’s why I hunted you down. And so I loved your strategy.
And can you please teach us your strategy? You rule of thumb in how you approach connections on LinkedIn. So they immediately are the right connections for you. Yes. So first I love that we’re diving into the direct messages because I have spent my most of my business with my direct messages, creating opportunity, creating business. That’s where it’s all going down and the is on LinkedIn,
but it’s not going to happen if we give our attention and spread ourselves too thin, we all understand that as business owners, we can not be spread too thin because when we spread ourselves too thin, we’re not really serving anybody. So I love the idea of taking radical ownership. This is my direct message experience. You’ve come into my world. You are invited in and I get to decide where I want the relationship to go,
not you. So I really like that. That is clear in my head. I don’t have to tell them that, but that’s what I’m thinking. It’s my mindset. And that I get to look at your profile except you very, I except pretty quickly, I would just say accept, except, um, that one looks a little something’s off. I go with gut instinct and sometimes I reject or click ignore.
I would say it’s 80, 20 rule, 80% of the time. I’m accepting connection requests. 20% of the time I’m saying ignore because something just looks off. You kind of know, maybe they don’t have a profile picture or maybe they don’t fill out their profile completely. And they don’t have, they have weird letters in their about section something, but I don’t click into their profiles,
just judge on quickly looking at their titles, looking at their profile picture and their name with that. You can turn around and if you want to take action on, like you said, they’re on my turf. They could be somebody I could warm up. They wanted to connect with me. I could turn around and say, thank you so much for connecting.
Cause I’m just acknowledging. There’s no message. There’s no nothing. You’re just starting from scratch. And we’ve heard over and over. And I was just listening to Shaylene Johnson the other day. And she reminded me of there’s a million people reminding us it’s 20 to 30 touch points before somebody becomes a purchaser, especially if you have a higher ticket or high trust business.
So why would we think that any conversation in the first message is going to convert, we have to have way more touch points. So what I do is I have a generic message that says, thanks for connecting. I love to get to know new connections in the comments on the platform, see you online, feel free to follow my hashtag Fox rocks,
Doody Fox. And by having my own personal hashtag, it creates a very easy light pitch clickable link that sends them to my most recent content. Love it, bam. They don’t have to navigate through my profile. They don’t have to navigate to where you find your most recent posts. Cause every once in a while, somebody will say, I can’t find where your most recent content.
It literally takes you to a newsfeed of Judy Fox Of Judy foxes, hashtagging, and just a side step. So for people that have no LinkedIn started using hashtags, what like two years ago now, but they do well. And so some of the hashtags that I follow on LinkedIn, they only have, you know, a few things coming up in the feed.
Whereas if you all have that same hashtag on Instagram, for example, you’re buried in millions and millions of posts. LinkedIn is there yet. And I love that hashtags in general, but I also love that you have your own branded hashtag, which is so cool and what a great way. Okay? So somebody sent you an invitation. You don’t click on their profile.
I don’t know if I like that too. Sometimes that LinkedIn always tells people their profiles. You don’t necessarily know their profile judging USS just based on the information from the invitation. And then you copy and paste this super nice relatable response saying, Hey, great, you want to connect with me? You know, go ahead and follow My hashtag. Yes.
What is this do at this point in time? What happens after this? So what happens is I either have people say, Oh my gosh, that’s great. You have a cool hashtag or the responses I get are I’m excited to engage in the comments or, you know, if they are respecting the boundaries, the only other message that is freaking awesome is when they turn around and they say,
I’ve been following you for awhile and I’ve been commenting and I love your content. And then isn’t that a great next conversation because I know you’ve had 10 to 20 touch points potentially. So you’re finding out by just that message, by the way they respond. Number one, are they going to respect the boundaries, which you didn’t make them harsh boundaries? You just said,
I like to do this. This is my it’s like a soft boundary. And then if they push back with like, that’s awesome, I have been watching your content. I really blah, blah, blah, something, whatever. Maybe they start a conversation. That’s super hot because you’ve positioned yourself already. And you wouldn’t know that unless you did that message.
It’s without pushing them to tell you, I hate the, why did you connect with me? Right. Okay. Now I have to do all this work to explain. It almost feels defensive. Whereas this one opens up the door. It’s like a slight door, but it also opens up the door to just being amazing comment conversation on the public platform.
And if that happens, you’re just gaining attention on your content, you know, a thousand more views or one more comment or one more share. Yeah. And at that perfectly brings us into the next thing that I want to talk about. What an amazing organic way to increase, increase the eyes on your content. I mean, this is brilliant in so many different ways.
I’m super stoked to be connected with you and love learning from you already, Kelly, my assistant is going to be like, Oh my gosh, April’s going to have 10,000 things for me to do on LinkedIn, send you a connection request. You send me a connection request so I can practice my new DM and come up with my experience. It too.
It’s fun to make your own gifts. Oh, okay. That’s alright. I have a waving. Hello gift. Are you serious? That’s another way to give people one more experience in LinkedIn direct messages. That is not the same as everybody else. I’m not trying to pitch. I’m waving. Hello. And it’s just a nice gift that I can upload really quick.
And it’s in the gift library. I love that. All right. There’s a million things that you can do is send Judy’s gift to you, everybody Fox and shout out to Chad who helped me first launch my gifts. Yay. Thank you, Chad. Okay. All right. So Let’s talk about the content we’re posting on LinkedIn. You have three different personalities that you talk about as recommendations for ways that individuals can show up on LinkedIn.
Can you dive into those three different personalities and how to operate within and why they’re really Huntly important? Yes. So instead of thinking, we always come from a place of, I need to be creating content for my business. I need to attract the right clients. And I always tell people, if you start with these three pillars of leadership voice, so it’s this idea that a leader is recognized by the way that they walk through this earth,
by the way that they show up online. And we kinda know when we see their content, but we don’t always put our finger on it. But if you break it down on LinkedIn like this, and I’ll share, I’m about to share, I’ll start with the opposite first, which is too many people think, and they get on LinkedIn, they come from this,
how can I help you? And that tends to be a very, very low hanging fruit that a lot of people grab onto. And they think that their content needs to come from, how can I help? How can I show up for my ideal client? So this is the opposite. So I want you to delete the world of how can I help you?
It’s not a bad world, but it hurts us. It really does. It hurts our positioning because it doesn’t position you as a leader. It positions you as a helper, helping the helpless and people on LinkedIn don’t want to be helpless. They want to be empowered. They want to also show up as leaders. If you have all of your employees underneath you and you are lifting them up and making them feel amazing,
you’re not helping them. You are empowering them. So we’re going to switch to an empower language. And then the next thing we’re going to switch to is the three categories, which are the challenger, the creator and the coach. So I’m going to start with the coach. The coach shows up as a go to resource. You know, when you have a boss that you can trust to go to,
or a leader, doesn’t even have to be a boss, you have a colleague in your world and you know that you can go to them. When you say, actually you did that. When you were saying, Hey guys, I need to crowdsource for a person to be on my podcast about LinkedIn. You already mentioned that. So you’re showing up as a go to resource and you’re allowing your community to show up as go to resources in the comments.
So instead of just holding court and preaching at us, you were saying, Hey everybody, I know you all are leaders. It’s implied by me saying, I need a go to resource, total different mindset. Okay? Yeah. So then you’ve got that energy and you can say, these are my top tools for working from home. These are my,
this is my mindset hack. That was one of my videos I did recently where I broke down my mindset hack. That’s a coach. That’s go to resource for sharing what works for me, but not telling me it has to work for you just saying, this is what I do. What do you do? How can you show up as a leader in my comments?
Right. Fascinating. Okay. So that’s the leader personality. And then the second one you mentioned was the neighbor personality really ENT. Yes. The creator personality. For example, I was mentioning Casey is doing her. Um, we think creative types, but we also think so she’s showing us her behind the scenes, TimeLapse of her video and the psychology behind that is a before and after energy.
We freaking love that because there’s something that connects in our brains to say, how did a creator get from here to here? It’s sharing the journey. So we love the journey we love seeing how did somebody earn six figures? How did somebody get from barely making ends meet to a seven figure business? Like how many freaking shows do we want to listen to online and podcasts?
So there’s that energy. And then the other part of that energy is step-by-step actions. So when we, as a creator can show up either with that before and after energy, the journey energy, the, those types of posts do so well because they’re positioned with that mindset to think, how could I take another human being from a to B, Love it.
I would say that my downfall is that I would just want to hang out in that personality all the time, just because I’m a teacher, that’s what we do here on the podcast. So I think all of my posts would be like, okay, step by step to go from here to there. But you could and sprinkle in the other ones. Yeah.
But I feel like that’s not, it’s just not deep enough, the way that we’re doing it as a company, to be totally honest. I mean, I’ll just throw my own company under the bus here on some of these shows to be like, we suck at this right now. And that’s why we’re, we’re recording this show. You know? And I really do feel like this is something that as you’re teaching and as I’m learning,
and if you guys are watching behind the scenes on the video, as I’m taking notes, I have like crazy Fox notes, scratched all over my paper, hashtag Fox or hashtag, you know, as we’re, as we’re doing this, I just, I can see myself being like, okay, I think maybe that’s all you do. And it’s just a little almost to the point where it’s redundant or shallow or something,
there’s something off about it. But these bats were the last Leadership style allows you to share a bit more of your, I don’t know what to call it, but like it’s called the challenger energy. So where you come across as learning from your mistakes, sharing some of the vulnerable parts of your business. And that’s probably where you can show up in all these other areas and be vulnerable with the coach saying,
Hey, I need a resource because, and that’s the vulnerable part of the story. Maybe there’s a part of that story that is vulnerable to you. But the challenger energy really does have a curious energy. I’m curious why this failed. I’m curious why it took me 10 years to get where I am, you know, and the figure outable energy as Marie Forleo would say,
it’s the energy of wrestling with something and showing that part in that post. So the way challengers show up is the curious questions. It’s figure outable, but you could have a figure outable energy together where you say, let’s figure this out in the comments below. I need to determine how to start a podcast. And I am struggling. There’s a million platforms to start on and it’s a little bit of the go to resource,
but you’re potentially opening up more of I’ve made mistakes along the way. How can I reverse share so you can learn the lessons along with me. I love that. So that would be an example of that Using yourself to the next level too. Oh, okay. That makes sense too. There’s the challenger from the past when you challenge your past, but you can also challenge your future.
And I, I meant to mention that because I didn’t want to leave you hanging with only looking at past mistakes. You can challenge the future. I have one client that made a post and we decided to do a challenge of reducing our sugars together. And so there’s that that’s still a relevant post for LinkedIn because it came across as a leadership. I still would want to see the leaders of my company.
If they are taking on a challenge to exercise, that’s something we want to talk about in business because health and bringing health to the workplace allows us all to operate better and live longer and thrive and have better meetings because we have less cranky people. You know what? I am just going down the rabbit hole there, but, And mentally process faster and all those things.
Yes. A hundred percent. Okay. So at a post that would just come to my mind would be the same. Hey, listen, I’ve stuck at LinkedIn, just starting out. And just saying that as a company, we aren’t connecting here. We haven’t really connected here authentically with the right businesses that we know that we can help. How do you guys do this year?
And so, by the way, If you let other people look amazing and the comments give you advice, it’s powerful. It’s such a crazy thing. It’s so true. But I think that oftentimes that we forget that a lot of the content should be reading. And we talk about this a lot on Instagram. You and I both love Instagram and even Facebook,
even though Facebook and I have a love, absolute despising loopy relationship with each other for a business standpoint. But we know the rule of thumb is, you know, people like to share things that make them look good just across the board. Shareable content is content. People like to share things to make them look smart and tall and wise and experienced and funny and you know,
all those things. And so that really opening up the LinkedIn communication platform with that same sort of philosophy and understanding that people want to show up and they want to feel good about themselves. And they want to position themselves as leaders. Absolutely freaking brilliant. And I’m so glad I found you. And I will say leaning into the leadership voice. The one thing that when you were mentioning,
they want to share because it makes them look good. It makes them taller. It makes them all these things. It also can make them look like their future selves to be a leader at a business like you were showing up as a leader, wherever, whatever space, it doesn’t matter what your title is. You can be a leader in your space.
And there’s something very shareable about that too. The idea of you are their future self and they share your content because they’re like, wow, I would love to write something like that. I’d love to put something like that, video out into the world and what that person shared was so powerful to me. I’m going to share it. And I think the highest shares,
I think I got close to about 200 shares of a post and that went to half a million views. So it is very, very powerful to be shared on LinkedIn when your content is the one being shared. Basically I got messages saying, all I do is get on LinkedIn and see your content. I love it. I can’t wait to binge your content on LinkedIn and spend more time.
I will be for sure. And so let’s do a quick recap about what we talked about today. Um, beside the fact that we talked about the sweet life company sax on LinkedIn, we will not after this show. And if you’re with me and you want to make sure that you are authentically unintentionally connecting with really great partners and affiliates and your clients,
then you have hung out with us to the end of the show and you have listened to the whole thing. And we should be applying strategies to which are pursing. We talked about the DM strategy, having a set response and a gift that you can send to them. And it’s that response that really is like, Hey, great, thank you so much.
Follow my hashtag, which triggers people to go follow your hashtag actually decide whether or not they want to actually connect with you more than it helps to disqualify, which I love just as much as it helps to qualify ideal connections on LinkedIn and it increases or Ganek reach with your content that you’re directing people back to your hashtag. And then you talked about being a leader on LinkedIn and showing up in three different personalities,
leadership, creator, and challenger. And so my next question to this, even though this could be an entirely different show, but just to wrap this up, how frequently do you recommend companies or individuals should be posting on LinkedIn? Currently it is May, 2020, and this always changes with every social media platform. But right now, how often do you think people should be showing up and posting on this platform?
Oh, so I have, what’s the reason why I have this container LinkedIn business accelerators, because you really do have different patterns for when you are a cold audience, a warm audience, a warm audience, and a hot audience. I consider my audience to be hot. On average, when I’m posting, I hit the 300 to 600 to a thousand likes and comments,
10,000 to a hundred thousand views. So with that audience, it’s a different strategy than a cold audience. So I would start with a cold audience and say, you should be commenting. I know that sounds really interesting, but you should be commenting at least 10, five to 10 comments that are high quality in your ideal circles. Your ideal clients go out into that world into your ideal businesses and conversations you want to be having.
So go out and do five to 10 of those a day. If you can do, if this is the ideal growth strategy, and then you would post two to three times a week. I have some of my clients right at the two posts a week and they’re getting anywhere from 10 to 20,000 views a week. So that’s that strategy. The next is what I call my it’s that warm audience there,
you should be testing and playing around a little bit more. And if you want to ramp up commenting, because again, commenting just changes your entire business. And some businesses drive more traffic by commenting and more business by commenting. Some do really well on video. So it’s almost like playing around in that medium area. That’s where I work with my clients to figure out what’s your sweet spot.
And then I come up with a sustainable strategy. So my sustainable strategy for myself would be different than yours. But mine, for example, is I have a pattern of video document posts, text only post or image posts. And then I do about one post a week because I’d rather have my audience trust that every time I post it’s high quality. And then I go out and I do a ton of comments because I ended up getting more business from engaging with my ideal clients and commenting and showing interest in them.
And then they ended up showing more interest in me. So I ended up having a lot of clients that have never liked and commented on any of my videos or content. I love that. And those connections then go back and happen in the BMS to close deals and land condoms, the same plants. Yeah. I convert business to the direct messages, or I set up my Calendly link to live on my LinkedIn profile,
which is another powerful way to position yourself. It’s right there, but it has an application process to it. And the main reason why is because any human being can see your public profile, if you have your settings on public. So I do want to have you fill out a few basic questions. Do you have a LinkedIn profile or you, do you have a website you want to share with me because some people might be starting from scratch.
I honor that, but I also just want you to have a gate because I can’t have everybody book a spot on my calendar. Also it’d be on the phone calls all day long. And obviously in any case with that too, just free screening appointments where they get to you. That’s yes, that’s incredible. And it’s pretty easy to set up with Calendly and it’s a very powerful part of your that’s why I call it LinkedIn business accelerator,
because I literally want you to get business. I have some clients, I had one client, I just did our second zoom call. One-on-one zoom call. And she said, I have been asked to be on a radio show. Now two podcasts, a live stream. And I’m now being asked to give a keynote presentation at a company online meeting because now everything’s online.
And I was like, that’s only after two weeks. And she was like, I know I just blown away. I love that LinkedIn has come. I think my first LinkedIn training I ever took was an old Lewis house, even though Lewis houses and alas young, it was like Lewis Howes linked, influenced training 2012 or something like that, Which is basically I remember the set us house days,
how to set up your profile. And I love big blue it’s health span anyway. Okay. It’s certainly come a long way. And I, I think as business owners, we’re starving for a platform that we can trust that we can engage in a very real way where we can count on generating high quality. And there is just so much missing from understanding how to do this on LinkedIn.
You don’t have to sort through all the noise on Facebook and even all the noise and other places like YouTube or Google ads or SEO, which is so many different ways, actually like we were saying on a human level. And now it’s always been my preferred way to sell and connect with clients. But now in 2020, we are seeing so much that relationship sell.
And it doesn’t matter if you are a multimillion dollar business or if you are hitting your first six figures, no relationships, relationships sell. And I love, I love your strategy you taught today, and I really appreciate your wisdom and your time, the best today. Do you So welcome. I appreciate yours. I can’t wait to, I can’t wait to bench this And you guys can check out,
go to Judy Fox, J UDI, fox.com. You follow her hashtag Fox rocks yes. On LinkedIn. And we will go ahead and make sure all the links that we discussed today are available for you in the show notes of this episode, which can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com slash one seven eight. Thank you so much. I appreciate your time.<inaudible> Thank you so much for sticking around to the end of this show.
I trust that you gained some very profitable and wise insights from Judy and from our conversation today. And I would love to know what your biggest takeaway is or what the action that you’re going to apply to your businesses. First, based on what you heard on today’s show on LinkedIn, share it with me, connect with me. Who’s over to LinkedIn search April beach and send me a connection.
And I would love to watch what you’re posting and connect with your content even greater. And then of course, make sure you’re following Fox rocks hashtag on LinkedIn, because Judy is certainly the expert. All of the show notes, everything we talked about on today’s episode, if you’re driving and just can’t write it down, all you need to do is remember episode number one 78.
If you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 78, everything they talked about and all the links we mentioned on today’s show will be found in there. I hope you haven’t Awesome. I will talk to you<inaudible

Episode 177: LinkedIn Ad Strategies To Increase B2B Sales – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Launch Your Online Programs

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 

Summary:

In this episode, we cover who should be running LinkedIn Ads, the 4 types of ads that can be run on Linked, and what you can expect to spend to get results. LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com and host of “The LinkedIn Ads Show” dives deep covering what you need to know as a business owner. If you’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure if it’s the right choice for your business goals, don’t miss this episode. 

Highlights:

  1. Know your ad budget
  2. Decide what kind of ads you should be running
  3. Know where to access your Ads account to get started. 

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey guys and welcome back. This is part two of a two part LinkedIn ad strategy business podcast training. This is episode number 177 if you missed one 76 and you were wondering about the fundamentals of LinkedIn ads and whether or not you should be even advertising on LinkedIn at all.
Stop this episode. Go back and listen to that one and then catch back up with us here we have J Wilcox in the house with us again and he really is my favorite business person right now because I have been waiting months and months to get him back on the show. I’ve had a ton of questions. And in last week’s and in this week’s episode you also hear a lot of behind the scenes and what’s happening in our company is I own two companies and some of the ad strategies that we’re using and then some of the questions that we have.
So you not only get a business training with these two shows, you’re going to hear a lot of behind the scenes about how we’re using advertising to grow our company as well. So I always try to be transparent with you guys and share with you actual case studies, whether it’s clients or in my own business. And then we have ADA, the expert here dishing exactly step by step how to go about doing this in your own company.
So in this show, it is an extension, like I said of last week, and we’re talking strategic ad strategy for B to B sales. So this show is, especially for those of you guys who have a business that serves other businesses. In this episode we’re covering who should be running ads on LinkedIn, the four types of ads that can be run on LinkedIn and what you should and can expect from your LinkedIn ads results.
At the end of this show, you are going to know a LinkedIn ad budget. You’re going to have a baseline ad budget that if you can’t come to the table with this ad budget, don’t come to the table at all ages really upfront about that. And so we have a come to Jesus moment about how much you have in your marketing. And so you’re not wasting your money or your time.
You’re also going to know what kind of ads you should be running on LinkedIn. And we dive into how to access the ads manager portal in LinkedIn as well as other really cool tracking that you can do even if you aren’t spending any money on LinkedIn ads at all. So we talk about how to install a LinkedIn tracking code on your business website so you can read a massive analytics to make smart choices for your company.
I’m super excited to dive into this part too, and you can find all of the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven seven alright, let’s go<inaudible>. All right, this is episode number 177 and I am back again with my very good friend at least I think he’s my good friend. That’s, he is my favorite person right now in business. AGA Wilcox,
who is then, I mean we last week dove into some really important foundational information about what companies can and should be leveraging LinkedIn ads. If you didn’t listen to the last week’s episode, you should stop this, pause it and go back and listen to episode number 176 you have a good foundation. You know, last week we talked about who should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You know, what type of companies benefit from that. Aja gave you guys the solid steps to start moving forward. For me, what it did is it got my wheels turning and of course, and then I had a million more questions, so I really appreciate him being back with us on the show today. So Aja, can you reintroduce yourself again to those who’ve not met you before?
Please? Oh sure. I’m so good about bragging about myself. I run a little ad agency. There are only eight of us. I mean we’re very small and nimble of eight people, but we are B to linkedin.com and we specialize only in running LinkedIn ads. We are official LinkedIn partners. We’re actually the only ad agency in the world, but certified partners with LinkedIn.
We run many of their largest accounts as well as many of the smallest and everything in between. We’re just hyper specialized and uh, call us one trick ponies, but we like what we do. I love it, I love it. Hey, you know what, be the one trick pony is a way to build a multimillion dollar business right now. And I love that you do that.
So that’s super cool for you. Now let’s just do like a super quick recap. Last week we talked about three different types of businesses that could benefit from advertising on LinkedIn. Can you rattle those off real quick for us again? Yes. Any sort of high lifetime value lead generation, whether it’s B to B or B to C is number one. Number two is higher education.
So think of like universities, MBA programs, recruiting. And then number three is any sort of white collar recruiting that you’re doing as a company just trying to hire new employees. Okay. My first question to that is totally a selfish question. Yeah. As a company, we love to run ads to this podcast, to the right audience for this podcast,
but when we look at the podcast, the podcast, you know, we don’t even run ads on the podcast intentionally, so I’m not talking about a lifetime value of, you know, I can’t say yes, this listener is going to generate me $15,000 plus in revenue. That’s not the way it works. So for just exposing an audience to content, would you recommend That a company or a podcast like yours or like mine advertises on LinkedIn to increase their listenership?
Or is it, wait and we’re going to dive into money. Is it way too expensive? Oh man, I love this question and I have a hard time with it because LinkedIn ads are really expensive. What we’re paying on average eight to $11 a click, and me personally, I’m a huge fan of podcasts. I’m a huge fan of podcasting, but when I look at it,
you can’t quite calculate what a listener is worth and what sort of lifetime value they will end up being in the future. I have a really hard time investing eight to $11 into that person and I personally don’t even advertise our own podcast on LinkedIn for this reason. I just don’t think the economics would work out, but I do advertise the podcast on Quora ads and I would on Facebook and on Instagram just because the costs are lower.
So the economics just gets in the way of LinkedIn’s amazing targeting sometimes. Darn it. Okay. Well hopefully someday that might change. Okay. So diving in today we are going to talk a little bit more deeply about the four types of platforms that LinkedIn ads appears on within LinkedIn. I’m super excited to do that. Different type of ads you can run.
You were talking about carousel ads and different strategies that businesses can use when they’re presenting their ad content to help our listeners decide which one is the best for them. And then we’re also going to talk about money and how much money you need to spend. I remember two years ago when we talked about there was a threshold that you told me April, if you can’t spend at least this amount of money,
don’t spend any. So I’m super curious how much is the minimum that we’re starting to see and then you know even for businesses, how to get started, where to find the ads manager, if you will, actually how to navigate to that within the platform and how to set up tracking for retargeting. So we have a really big show and thank you for joining us again AIJ and thanks to you guys for tuning in.
If you’re listening to this show, it’s because you have a business that you are curious whether or not you could increase your sales with LinkedIn ads. And so you are certainly in the right place. So AIG, let’s first of all, let’s dive into the four different types of ads that someone can run on LinkedIn. Perfect. So number one that I tell everyone to start with is called sponsored content.
It shows up right in the newsfeed, which is the homepage experience on both desktop and mobile. So this is a great way of getting in front of pretty much all your users. These come in several different flavors. There’s static image, which I think everyone should start with. It’s just a single one image that’s so easy to create and troubleshoot. Then there’s also video,
which we talked about last week. I don’t really love video ads on LinkedIn. They’re pretty expensive and there’s no retargeting yet that comes in the fall of 2020 but there’s also one called carousel. But if you’ve used Facebook ads, you’ll recognize it’s multiple images that someone can scroll through within your ad. And to all of these, you can actually fix something called a lead generation form ad,
and it’s a native form that goes right within your ad itself. So someone can convert on your ad without ever even leaving LinkedIn. It’s really nice and easy all filled in from your profile information pre-filled. So all they have to do is just hit submit and it creates some really high conversion rates. Okay, that’s crazy. So when we’re talking about Facebook ads or Instagram ads or any other ads,
we have to send them to a separate landing page and it actually leads the platform, which is a big stumbling block for many businesses who also build their own websites or they have a very small tech team because then they have to go, Hey, I need you to build a landing page. It needs to have a forum and it needs to connect with this CRM.
So you’re saying that LinkedIn can actually put the lead gen form there within the ad itself? Yes. And Facebook and Instagram can do this too. I think Twitter might have actually even had it before Facebook and YouTube can now do it too, so everyone seems to be jumping on this, this horse, but it’s a great feature and one that LinkedIn probably released four or five years after Facebook.
Wow. But I think what most Facebook advertisers have found is yes, it increases conversion rates, but at the same time it lowers lead quality because the user didn’t have to put forth as much effort to get to know you. And so a lot of times they’ve forgotten that they’ve had, the feedback I’ve heard from Facebook advertisers is we contacted them and they say,
I didn’t fill out a form with you guys. I’ve never even heard of you. Right. We do tend to see the same kind of thing on LinkedIn, but we’ll see. Cost per conversion, cost per lead ends up dropping by 30 to 80% but lead quality might only drop by 10 to 20% so you’re still net positive and it can still be worthwhile doing.
Fascinating. Yeah. We’ve never used that tool or that strategy on Facebook. At all, we always, you know, send them to a landing page where they can see really what it is they’re offering and whether or not they want that. So very interesting talking about the decrease in the quality of lead versus the decrease in the cost per lead. Fascinating.
Okay, so that is the newsfeed. So that’s running ads right there in the main newsfeed of LinkedIn, the one that everybody sees. And in the last show you mentioned that you have to have a LinkedIn company page to do so Yes, that’s correct. Okay. Now what are the other places where ads can appear in LinkedIn? So I think the next most interesting is called sponsored messaging.
That’s the category. And as is inherent to the name it’s messages, right? It actually shows up in your LinkedIn inbox or your InMail. These can show up in two different flavors. There’s one called a message ad and then one that’s called a conversation ad. So the message ad would be like an InMail that someone sends to you. Someone opens it up,
it says words, and you can, if you want to respond to that or not. But the conversation ads is LinkedIn’s newest ad format. And think of it like a chat bot. You can ask someone a question and then based off of how they respond, give them a different offer or a different link or ask them a further question. So these can be fantastic if you,
one of the main uses we’ve found for these is a lot of people want to try to push people towards their booths at trade shows. Obviously when in person events become a thing again, but of course if you’re advertising you need to ask someone first like are you going to be at this show? And so if they say, yes, I’m going to be at this big industry conference,
then you can start pushing them towards the booth. But if they say no, you could say, well, Hey, do you want to join this webinar that we’re putting on next week? So you’re giving people more options and a better chance of relevancy of your offer to them. Okay. Couple of questions. First of all, do you have to be connected with people to run message or conversation ads to them?
Do they have to be a connection? No, they don’t have to be connected to you in anyway. When you pay LinkedIn for these message ads, you don’t pay per click like you do with the rest of their ad formats. With this one, you pay to send it to them so you define the same way that you would have defined any of your other ad targeting by job title and company size and industry and all that,
and then they’re randomized to that audience so you don’t have to be connected as long as you paid them their 20 to 65 cents to send it, they will deliver it to an audience that fits your targeting. Okay, fantastic. Question number two, we’re more of just an observation. An automated chat box within LinkedIn sounds amazing. I mean we use messenger chat and different things within Facebook that are so important and so powerful.
This is so super cool. This sort of automation or relationship building, utilizing AI to build relationships with our leads is absolutely. I totally geek out on that stuff, so I love that. But question number three, as a LinkedIn user, I don’t know that I want to receive chat ads in my chat as a LinkedIn user. That might piss me off if some like rando person sends me a message.
Is there any pushback yet on people that are like, dude, get out of my chat box on LinkedIn Because they could only give responses that you’ve coded in. We don’t get free form responses of people like shutting us out or anything, which is probably a really good thing. Maybe in the future if there’s like a, an open kind of response. But Lincoln’s done a really good job of these.
Yeah. As a member you can only receive one every 45 days. So in case you get one that pisses you off, you’re not going to get pissed off again for at least another month and a half. I guess it keeps that uh, annoyance factor to a minimum. Okay. And can people turn this off like all together? Like never send me an ad through my messenger or it’s just this one in 45 days.
Part of being on the LinkedIn platform. Ooh. I think if you go into privacy settings, I think you can opt out of receiving these altogether, but realize that when someone takes me into kind of like a little bit of a DVS mode, but if someone sends you a really crappy one of these, they’ve essentially destroyed their brand to you and they paid just to deliver it to your inbox no matter what sort of action you take.
So I think one of the worst punishments you could give them is stay opted in so they spend more money on you in the future and just waste cash. But I don’t know. Okay. I think that that is so funny. You are super devious. I am more like, I have no filter. I’d be like, dude, this actually, this sucked total squirrel moment.
You know when people send me things that are just terrible, I just can’t help myself. I actually had a company, this is a complete squirrel moment, but funny here, my listeners are used to this with me. I had a PR company pitch somebody for my podcast last week and it was the worst pitch I’ve ever received. I actually felt so terrible for the person that we’re pitching that I went and I hunted down the person that we’re pitching on Instagram,
sent a screenshot and said, listen, if you are paying this company, don’t cause you are never going to land a podcast guest spot from one woman to another. Your business looks fascinating. Please don’t waste your more money on this company. So I am so I’m totally, the person would be like, your message sucks. Do not send me this message again.
What a waste of know. I would even like connect with them on LinkedIn just to tell them their LinkedIn ad sucked. But sometimes that gets me into trouble cause I have a big mouth and I just can’t. So like you, we want to know this stuff. We want that feedback. And there’s a class of people like me who would never tell,
tell you to your face and there’s a class of people like you who would actually inform them that they were making stupid decisions. This was woman was like, thank you so much. She could have been like you, you know? But she was like, thank you so much for telling me. So I kind of like, I kind of held my breath to wait for,
I didn’t know what her response was going to be. They Kevin, she was like, thank you so much for telling me. Okay, so end of squirrel moment. Back to our four platforms where we can send LinkedIn, we have the sponsored content and the newsfeed. We have the sponsored messaging ads, whether it is the message ad or the conversation ad going through inbox or in mail.
Now the next one you said text ads when we spoke before. Yes, so text ads show up only in the right rail as well as the fourth platform, which we’ll talk about here in a minute as well. But the right rail, it’s important to understand is only available when you’re on a computer. So your mobile device isn’t going to show you this.
So that cuts down on the audience that can see these. But what I want you to understand about text ads is they are very, very risk. They are simultaneously LinkedIn’s lowest cost ad and they also have the lowest engagement rate, which means if you screw this up, it won’t cost you very much because not very many people are going to click on it anyway.
And then when they do click, it doesn’t cost very much cause it’s the cheapest ad format you can pay all the way down to $2 per click from these. So if you’re looking to just dip your toe in the water and you’re okay with getting visitors that are on desktop that they’re not on mobile, this is by far the best way to test into your audience and your offers and check it out without really spending much money at all.
Fascinating. Okay. So maybe start there before you send somebody a conversation. Okay. And then the fourth one is a dynamic ad. What is that? Yes. So dynamic ads, you may have seen them, but you just may not know that what they were, I call them LinkedIn’s creepiest ad format. They actually take your picture, your profile picture and stick it into the app.
So if you’ve ever seen an ad that says like, Hey, April, picture yourself at IBM or at Microsoft and it’s like your picture next to the Microsoft logo or IBM logo. It started out as a job placement kind of ad and then they eventually gave it to us as marketers and said, Hey, however you want to stick someone’s picture in an ad,
go for it. So these used to be really expensive and they just reduced the price earlier this year, so to about a third of where they were. So I actually now started recommending these to people there are slightly cheaper than sponsored content, but again, they’re like text ads. They don’t get clicked on very much cause they’re way over in the right rail.
They’re obviously an ad, but they cost less on a per click basis than your sponsored content will. They’re like maybe six to $8 a click rather than the eight to 11 that you’ll probably pay in sponsored content. Okay. That’s really creepy. But kind of cool. I would definitely, if somebody had my face in the right hand column there, I certainly would stop and be like,
what am I doing down there? So very interesting. And I could see like you were saying possibly like picture yourself here, picture yourself doing this. Certainly for the educational institutions, you know that are trying to get people into their higher education programs like picture yourself with your MBA or whatever. Super cool. All right, so those are our different platforms.
And then last week we hit on the video ads really aren’t converting static image ads are doing better. And then can you just share a little bit about the way carousel ads? Like what is a carousel ad, what is this look like when it’s showing in LinkedIn? Because these are the ads we get great results with carousel ads for our podcast. So we will run like an image and we’ll kind of,
people can scroll through within the ad to different podcast episodes. You know you need this click here and they do really well. So is it, is it set up the same way? Yes, in fact it’s a direct rip off. If I say so, I, without getting in too much trouble, a direct rip off of the way that Facebook pulled it off.
So in your newsfeed you will have one ad with multiple pictures that on mobile you can just thumb through, scroll through or on desktop you can click an arrow and just see a variety of things. So podcast episodes is a great use case for this. Same with like an in person event or a summit, you might put like four pictures or five pictures of some of your best speakers that are going to be speaking.
These are great use cases for it, but be aware, I don’t recommend these very much on LinkedIn because they don’t necessarily perform much better than just a static image and they don’t cost less. So I go, well, okay, I could spend the time of essentially creating four or five little ads inside of one ad, or I could just create four or five separate ads and it would take the same amount of time and cost the same.
So it’s kind of a toss up, but certainly it’s a format that’s available to you. Okay, Good to know. Okay, now let’s talk about money. Oh yes, the important importance. Let’s dive into money break down LinkedIn ad spend, breakdown budget. Let us hear it. Just lay it out there cause I know it. Yeah, It’s not cheap,
right? So I’m going to be a little bit brutal here because I’m so tired of people coming to me and going, Oh man, I spent $300 on LinkedIn ads and they just don’t work. And I go, Oh man, $300 like that’s just a handful of clicks. You can’t learn anything on that small of data. So what I’m hoping that you as listeners are hearing here is if you aren’t going to bring a large enough budget to actually test it out,
I wouldn’t bring any budget at all. I would save up until you do have it. And what that budget is depends on a lot of different factors depending on what you’re trying to learn. So here’s what I’ve found, and this has nothing to do with advertising. This is just a data model. If you have, let’s say around a thousand dollars in spend,
and this is in North America, it costs a lot less to advertise anywhere else in the world. So the numbers can change slightly. But if you’ve spent about a thousand dollars on advertising on LinkedIn, you will generally have statistical significance to your click through rate. So what that means is this type of thing that you can learn is if I’m testing two,
three, four different ads that are pushing on a different motivation here, I can find out statistically what my audience likes and what they react to better. So if your goal is just to find out with significance, do people like what I’m telling them is my motivation, right? Am I pushing on their rate pinpoint within about a thousand dollars in ad spend?
Whether that’s over the course of two days or over six months, you can find that out. Okay. So that is really, I think that’s encouraging because I think the last time we talked two years ago, you said that we were going to need at least 3000 to start understanding how people are responding our ads. Yes. And so I’ll, I’ll take that to the next step here.
If your whole goal is just to find out what ad copy are people going to click on, you can do that with statistical significance with about a thousand dollars but now because of LinkedIn’s costs increasing as they have over the last few years, if your goal is actually to figure out what gets people to convert, which offer, right? You know I have a webinar and I have a free guide,
which one converts best? You can find that out statistically within about $5,000 in ad spend. So if your goal is to find out what is my cost per conversion, what is my conversion rate? Don’t spend less than $5,000 and think you’ve got it. But if your goal is just to find out what people are interested in, then you probably don’t have to spend much more than a thousand dollars just to make sure you’re on the right track.
So full lead generation track, I would say don’t spend less than 5,000 budgeted towards it, but you can test on less and just depending on what you want to learn, a portion of that much money to it. Okay. And that completely makes sense why the ideal business needs to be selling a product with $15,000 or greater in value. Because this is,
I mean significantly, I mean we have, we have clients running Facebook ads for, you know, as little as $5 a day. So it’s huge difference in ad spend. But the reason why I love the LinkedIn platform is because it’s really right now, you know, when we go on Facebook, we go on Instagram, there’s so many other distractions.
So when our clients go on there, you know, they’re seeing grandma’s birthday and they’re seeing your advertisement to your high end mastermind and it’s really hard to get people to focus in on the business aspect of it. Our clients are in this place where they really need to reach their target audience who isn’t distracted, who’s there for a reason. I mean and obviously specifically our clients that are B2B,
that sort of other businesses, which not all of our clients do, but it’s a significant portion of of who we consult in business strategy. And so we’re saying $5,000 really minimum ad budget. But the interesting thing you said here, which does it make any sense to me is there’s no rhyme or reason is the time in which you drip that $5,000 out.
So you telling me that that $5,000 whether I spend it in the first two weeks or spend it in five months is going to give me the same data. Yeah. Because the only difference here is time. So if you’re in this period of super weirdness like we’re in with COBIT right now, time can change a lot of things. If you were trying to run the same ad three months ago and it was dripping into,
now you could tell that would make a big difference. But in general, I mean if you’re talking about just a normal quarter, let’s say the same ad going to the same audience where not a whole lot is changing, seasonality wise, the data is going to be about the same. So I would say as you’re testing things, maybe take the seasonality into mind and analyze it a little bit.
But in general, add performance today and add performance six months from now. It’s all gonna look the same. When you combine it in a spreadsheet and aggregate that data together and you really just want to make sure you have enough data to analyze. So five K in ad spend metrics in an Excel sheet is going to look the same whether it was over six months or a single day.
Okay. I think that’s fascinating and I think that’s encouraging to a lot of our listeners who want to get into LinkedIn ads, but they’re like, man, I don’t have 5,000 to invest in it this month, but I could have 5,000 to invest in it over the next six months. So I love that. All right, so next question. Moving on.
There is a very powerful, scary big brother watching you pixel that Facebook gives advertisers to embed in their website so that we can track people who have visited our website and then re target them with our ads. Does LinkedIn have a similar tracking opportunity? Yes. So LinkedIn has an insight tag that anyone who’s listening, whether you spend a dime on LinkedIn ads or not,
you can go and open up an account and install this thing on your website. And it does three things. So the first is like what you mentioned with Facebook does retargeting. So if you have this on your website, you could eventually go into LinkedIn ads and say, I want to show people ads who visited my website before in the last 90 days or something.
So that’s one use of it, which can be pretty good. Number two is you get these free website analytics from LinkedIn that no one knows about but are free and great. So once that tag is on your website, you can then go look at LinkedIn and see the demographic breakdown. What’s the job titles that people tend to have who visit my website?
What companies by name have visited my website, you know like, Oh my gosh, last 10 or the 10 most important, or what industry or what seniority do people tend to be? So I recommend everyone have this. It’s a great tag to have, even if it does feel a little bit big brother. Okay. That’s like Christmas to me. Okay,
so everybody should go in. Let’s talk about now just wrapping this up here in the show we’ve talked about so much. Where do people go to actually set up this ads manager within the LinkedIn platform itself? What does that look like? Great. If you’re already in LinkedIn, you can click on a in the upper right hand corner under the work menu and you’ll see an icon that says advertise,
but if you want to navigate straight there, the easiest way I’ve found is just type in linkedin.com forward slash ads ads and that’ll get you there. You click on the create button at the top and it’ll walk you through the whole process of creating your account if you don’t already have one. Okay. Love that. And then again, another selfish question for me and yeah,
forgive me to my listeners, cause I know this doesn’t apply to many you, but I own two companies and so I have two LinkedIn business company pages and completely separate websites as well. Is it possible to create two separate LinkedIn business ad manager accounts because the audiences are totally separate within LinkedIn? Or do I actually have to create two completely different LinkedIn personal accounts?
Ooh, great question. Yes. One person can be connected to as far as I can tell, an infinite number of ad accounts and you can create as many as you want. So if I were you under your same profile login, I would go and create two separate ad accounts, one for each company and then just run them separately. Love it.
Okay. That makes my life so much easier. It’s not quite as easy. It should be quite as easy, but it’s not quite as easy on the tech side of it for me to figure that out. So I always have to give that to to other people that figure out for me. So I love that. That actually sounds really easy. Okay,
so let’s kind of recap again. Today was part two of our two part training here with the one and only AIJ Wilcox, the LinkedIn ads King himself who is the founder of be two linked.com. You guys should totally go check him out and follow him on LinkedIn. Um, we talked about before different places where your LinkedIn ads can appear, right? So sponsored content messaging,
content, text ads and dynamic ads. You also covered, you know, different type of ads to run whether video ads or carousel ads or static image ads. And then we also talked about the lead gen forums. Super cool. So much information. I learned so much on today’s show and I really appreciate that. And we talked about money, talks about being honest about the budget.
This is not one of those things you can go into passively. If you’re a life coach or you teach yoga classes, you’re not going to benefit from what I’m hearing you say AIG right now on LinkedIn, unless you have a really big ad budget and in less the value of what you’re selling has a lifetime of being greater than $15,000 from a client, from a lead on LinkedIn.
So we talked about that and you guided us through how to find the ads manager and how to set up your LinkedIn insight tags, which everybody, regardless of whether or not you are going to be advertising on LinkedIn now or in the future, should go and create this LinkedIn ads account and get this insight tag so that you can start getting these crazy awesome analytics cause this is what we really want.
And you know, I know a lot of businesses don’t use analytics as much as they should. They don’t look at who’s going to their website, who’s searching this, you know, what are the most common search terms for what I sell in my geographic area. These are things that as business owners, if we have these tools available to us, especially for free,
it absolutely cuts months and thousands and thousands of dollars off of our learning curve of guessing, putting a hypothesis out there and wondering if it’ll work. And I love that LinkedIn offers this tool and I appreciate you so much for just jamming on all this and walking me through this strategy and always just having the best guidance and being super honest with our audience about who this is for and who this isn’t for.
So just totally appreciate you. Thank you. I will. Thanks for letting me share. This is the highlight of my week is getting to just freak out about LinkedIn ads. So thanks for giving me the opportunity. Oh, you’re the best. We totally appreciate it. Okay, so for people to find you again, what is your podcast and exactly,
you know, how can they connect with you the most as far as if they want to get on the phone with you and just say yes, agent, I’m ready to get started on this. Can you help? Sure. So the LinkedIn ads show search for that in whatever podcast player you’re using. I should be in all of them. We have about under 20 episodes so far,
but it’s growing and we go real deep on LinkedIn ads. So this is right up your alley. Go dive in there. And then, uh, if you want to chat, go to BTU, linkedin.com our website. Fill out the form on any of those pages. They don’t go to a sales rep, they just go directly to my inbox, so feel free to reach out and I’d love to chat with you.
Awesome. Thank you so much. And this is sweet life podcast number 177 so for all the show notes, if you’re on the go, you couldn’t take notes, you want to go back to all these links. We’re going to make sure we put them nice and organized for you inside the show notes on our website so you guys can cruise over to sweet life,
podcast.com/one seven seven and hyper connect to AAJ from there. Thanks so much JJ. I really appreciate you absolutely party on Z.
 

Episode 176: LinkedIn Ads: How To Get Started – April Beach and AJ Wilcox

AJ Wilcox SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grow Your Business Online

Who This Episode is Great For:

New and established businesses who want to learn if LinkedIn is the right platform to reach your ideal audience. 

Summary:

You’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn but you’re not sure where to start, or if it’s a wise choice for your business. LinkedIn is a powerful ad platform, but it’s unlike others and you need to be sure you’re spending your marketing money for the ROI you expect. 
 
In this episode my friend and LinkedIn Ads Expert, AJ Wilcox, founder of B2Linked.com covers what types of companies benefit from LinkedIn Ads, the 3 components of successful ad strategies and basic steps to get started. You’ll leave knowing if LinkedIn is the right platform for your business and what types of ads you can start running now.

Highlights:

  1. Decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn
  2. Learn how LinkedIn ads work
  3. Know the 3 components of a profitable LinkedIn Ad strategy 

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hey Darren, welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast. This is episode number 176 and I’m April leech if we don’t know each other yet. I’m a business development strategist for companies who are looking to launch and scale online and develop online programs,
offers and services to increase your profit and everything we talk about on the show is giving you tools and strategies that you can take to the bank is a matter of fact. If this is your first time here, you will soon know that the business trainings we deliver here on this podcast, a lot of coaches and consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for, so it’s all for you.
It’s our mission in order to grow small businesses and it’s our commitment to do this week after week. So thank you for joining us today on the show is part one of a two part series and I’ve invited my friend AIJ Wilcox to come back and chat with us on this show. We’re talking to those of you guys who have businesses and you want to learn if LinkedIn is a right platform to reach your ideal audience.
So you might’ve been thinking about advertising on LinkedIn, but you’re not sure where to start or if that’s even the right platform for you to advertise in. You know LinkedIn is a really powerful ad platform, but what you’ll learn in this episode is there a lot of businesses that are showing up and putting money into LinkedIn that it’s not really the right fit for you.
And then there are other companies who are showing up in you don’t have the ad strategy or you might’ve been actually spending your money incorrectly on the wrong type of ads. So this is part one of a two part series where Aja and I are diving into, you know who should be on LinkedIn. And at the end of this episode you are going to decide if your company should be advertising on LinkedIn.
You’re going to know how LinkedIn ads work and you’re going to know the three components have a profitable LinkedIn ads strategy. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and bring AGA onto the show and everything we’re talking about can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one seven six All right, here we go, you guys. This is episode number 176 and I am so excited because my friend AIJ Wilcox is here with me now.
AAJ has been a guest on this show. It’s been about two years. I hunted him down because I wanted to know more about LinkedIn ads, but the honest truth is I have done nothing with the strategies he me because our business, our ad dollar was focused on Facebook and Instagram. But the truth of the matter is is you know we’re a business to business company and we need to be advertising on LinkedIn.
And so I had to hunt him down again and say, Hey, listen my friend, I need to know where to get started again. And I have so many clients that I believe need to be putting their marketing money into LinkedIn ads and we don’t even know where to start. So who do we call our Ghostbusters friend J Wilcox. So Aja, thank you so much for being back on the show.
Um, reintroduce yourself to our audience so they know who you are. Sure thing. April, I’m excited to be back. Name as a, you know, a J Wilcox. I run an ad agency called B to linked.com and we are a very small, there’s only eight of us, but we’re an agency that specializes only in advertising on LinkedIn. So we go crazy deep.
Everything from teaching people how to run their own accounts, consulting, training, all the way to managing the accounts or are you to get your best performance from the buck. Because as we know from the last episode, LinkedIn ads are incredibly expensive. And so any mistake you make or any learning curve you go through, it has to be financial consequences we’ll say.
So working with a team who understands what works and what doesn’t and kind of cut through all that has been really good for our clients. So that’s what we do. And uh, I think we’ve grown a little bit since we talked last. I think when we talked before we only had two people on the team. I think you have to, yeah,
I’ve seen you all over the place. I think when we talked your kids were little in the background, which they’re probably still a little way littler than mine and you are just like, yes. You know, we’re getting started with this. And even when we talked though, even with just two of you, you were telling me how your agency was handling huge ad accounts for people on LinkedIn with like crazy results.
So let’s kind of start there with just answering the question. Who right now should be advertising on LinkedIn? Yeah. So I think there are three categories of companies that I think are a really good fit. So the first is if you’re doing lead generation of any kind with a high lifetime value, and so in my mind, that’s when you close a customer.
If they’re going to be worth $15,000 or more to you, then it’s pretty much a no brainer. So that’s B2B or even there’s some B to C lead gen that can get in that arena. But most of what we do is B to B. The next is higher education. Things like MBA programs who are recruiting the educational targeting that LinkedIn gives us is really good for those kinds of folks.
And then finally, as you’d imagine with LinkedIn recruiting works really well, just white collar hiring someone. So if you’re looking for a new sales manager, you can target people who already have the title of sales manager in your area and ask them if they’d be interested in applying it if you look interesting to them. And those are the three categories that make a lot of sense on LinkedIn.
Okay. So now that you’ve answered that, I feel like I need to take us a little bit of a step backwards. Is LinkedIn still this place where it’s ideal to use this platform to find a job more of like an online resume platform? Or are we finally starting to see a change in LinkedIn to become more of a social platform? You know,
why are people on LinkedIn? Yeah. If you would’ve asked me before 2014 I would have told you, yep, it’s a job searching platform, but since then, you know, you log in and there’s a newsfeed and then for entrepreneurs like you and me, we love the organic newsfeed because it’s so easy for our content to go viral. We’re able to reach people in the right mindset in ways that you just never could on Facebook or Instagram where competition’s higher.
Right. So yeah, it’s a fantastic platform for communicating right now. Not everyone has adopted and figured that out, but I think that is good for those of us who are ahead of the curve. Yeah, for sure. And I know that’s something we’re diving into more as a company and that’s a whole nother show is chatting about that. So let’s kind of get back to B to B,
diving into client or I should say business type number one. So high value ROI. And so that brings us back to the next question of how do you even get started with LinkedIn ads? Is this something that if somebody says, Hey listen, I have a program or I have a product that I want to sell to this company, this corporation, and I want this corporation to be a longterm client of mine.
Is this the ideal type of business that should be diving into LinkedIn? Yeah. So when you start thinking about like even before you decide which platform you want to go after, I keep an acronym in my mind called ammo ammo. And it’s the three things you need for any sort of social promotion. So the first is a is audience, the M is your message and the O is your offer.
So LinkedIn is so good at targeting the right audience if it’s in B2B specifically because we can target people by all kinds of great things, job titles, seniority, what groups, they’re members of skills, they have company size industry. All of that. So you have that in mind. If you know LinkedIn is a good fit for your audience, then you move on to the acronym letter at the end.
Oh, it’s the offering. We know if you put an ad up that just says, click here to talk to our sales rep, or click here for a demo or click here to buy something. You’re not giving anyone any reason to actually interact with your ad. No one will click. Or if they do, it’ll cost a lot per click. So you gotta have something that’s actually media and interesting so that they’ll have a reason to interact with you.
And then once you know what that, Oh, your offer is the message of what is actually being shown to the customer is really easy to figure out. You’re picking a couple lines of and an image, and once you have all three of those things, it’s really easy to go into the LinkedIn ads platform and build your first campaign and ads, but plan out your ammo beforehand.
Got it. I love that acronym. All right. And so when we’re talking about actually what type of ads do well on LinkedIn, we know for example, on Facebook it’s video, everybody wants video. Is LinkedIn the same? I mean, can we get the same click through rate or whatever LinkedIn calls it for a static image as we could with running a video ad?
Can we run video ads on LinkedIn? Yes. So LinkedIn does have video ads, but I don’t recommend them yet. They’re not quite the silver bullet on LinkedIn like they are on Facebook. And I think it’s mainly a pricing concern. On Facebook, you’ll pay one to 2 cents per person who watches at least three seconds of a video on LinkedIn, it’s 10 to 20 times that.
So we oftentimes see 10 15 20 cents per view, which is just quite frankly more than I think people should be paying. So if you have great video creative and you’ve tested on other platforms, absolutely bring it over to LinkedIn and test it. But I would say for your very first dipping your toe in the water of LinkedIn, start with a static image.
Make it as simple as possible. So that you can read the results. If video ad is kind of hard to troubleshoot, you don’t know if it was your ad copy that didn’t perform or the video or a combination of the two. But if it’s just a static image, you know, it was either your text or your image and if there’s a problem you can fix it very quickly and try it again.
Okay. Thank you for that. That is so interesting. Yeah, we’re getting a, you know, even most recently you and I recording this podcast here real time, it’s not prerecorded. More meeting. This one’s going to drop just in about nine days. So real time. As we’re speaking right now, our video ads on Facebook are at 1 cent.
I mean, they’ve never been cheaper, but you’re right, like the static image ads, you know, we’re seeing, you know, conversions, $2 $3 a conversion. And so we stopped doing those because I just think that’s ridiculous to pay. So good to know that that is a flip because I think for people that are getting started with ads, especially companies that are doing their own ads,
when we throw into them all these other techie things, they have to figure out like you got to do a dynamic video and maybe it should have some music in it and we need to put some text over the video. It just becomes so daunting. I think that entrepreneurs are so busy, they’re like, I’m out. I’m just not even doing that.
And those are the things that we’re telling them and they have to do on other ad platforms. So I love that LinkedIn isn’t that way yet. It’s much easier to get them started. So a question for you now about the static image. Does LinkedIn have rules about the images like Facebook does? For example, there can’t be so much text over an image.
Do people seem to be responding more to just an actual picture or is it a picture with texting? Graphics? Yes and no. So the issue here is that I like probably the rest of you absolutely hate the 20% rule. On Facebook. Yeah, the restriction that, Oh, you put too much text in your image. So Facebook’s not going to show it.
LinkedIn doesn’t have that. But what we find is time and time again in all of our testing is the more text we put in an image that we’re set performs. So I like the freedom that LinkedIn gives you. They’re not going to penalize you for it because we have found some instances where text on the image data improve performance. So definitely test. But I would say keep it in mind that the whole purpose of your image is just to get people to stop scrolling so that they will read your ad copy.
So don’t try to convert someone from the image, make sure the image is bright and colorful and contrasting so that they’ll stop and actually read your thoughtful ad copy that will convert. Okay. Thank you for that. Alright, so now let’s kind of switch back a little bit to my original questions about targeting. So many of our clients, many of our customers,
they have programs that they want to sell. They’re either coaches or service providers. Quite a few of them have corporate programs and so they’re trying to reach the internal champion of that. The one that says, Oh my gosh, look at this. That just came through from the Sweetlife company or whatever. I want to take this to my decision maker. And so one of the problems is finding that internal champion.
So when we’re talking about how to target ads on LinkedIn, like who to run the ads to, you mentioned we can break up ads by title and educational level. Talk to us about really how hyper-focused we can get with direct targeting to specific people to find either the champion or the decision maker that initiated the interest in a company or a program. Oh,
I love this question. So here’s what we can do. If you know the individual title or role that you’re trying to go after, then you can build a campaign targeting just people of that title and role in that company size, in that type of industry. And you can go all the way down to the minimum audience size of 300 so I like to use the example because it’s so easy to picture.
If you want to target just the CEOs of the fortune 500 you can do that. You can target job title of CEO at this list of 500 companies and you can hit them all the way down to an audience size of just 300 so I like to kind of break an audience up into two different levels. There’s the person who’s actually feeling the pain. Then you have maybe the influence,
maybe not the influencers, maybe the actual signers, the decision makers, and depending on what stage of that process you’re trying hit, you could target one or the other or both at the same time. So if I’m going after marketers, for instance, because I am a marketer, I think like this, if I’m selling a an advertising tool, I might show an ad to the individual contributor level,
the person who’s actually pulling the buttons and turning the switches. I guess you can’t really turn a switch, but you get the idea. Yeah, I can target them with an ad about, Hey, wouldn’t this make your life easier if you could do this faster and more accurately? And then I might target more of like the manager and above or director and above maybe just the VP level with messages like save money by your employees,
being more, uh, more efficient at building ads quicker. And you have that freedom because you can break them up into two different camps or five different camps if you want and show them all different creative messaging. Yeah, so smart. Okay, next question. Can we geotarget ads? So if I only want to run ads here in Colorado, can I do that on LinkedIn?
Yes, you can. So up until about three months ago, LinkedIn’s GOs were really limited. They were only like Metro areas. So for instance, in Colorado you might have like Denver Metro and you’re like, Oh, well what about just like a specific zip code? You couldn’t do it. But since then LinkedIn has integrated their geo targeting with the being Microsoft data.
Very cool. Yes. If you’ve ever used Bing ads, it’s a great platform. Rivals, Google ads. And about every way you can think of. And it’s half the cost. So they’ve merged those data sets. So now you as a marketer, you can target all the way down to an individual city level. We’re not zip code, we’re not radius yet like you can do on Facebook and Google,
but it’s a lot more specific. Okay, I have a million questions for you. Ha. You’re my favorite. My favorite person right now. Okay. So when we’re actually for those people that are listening, we’re actually going to break this podcast episode into two because we know you guys are short on time and so we’re going to have to really short,
hard-hitting full of information episodes for you. So when you’re listening to now 176 and next week’s episode one 77 and next week’s episode, I want to talk about ad spend budget strategy. Wrapping up here, we’ve talked about a lot of things. So we, you have mentioned the three types of businesses that are really great candidates to advertise on LinkedIn. The first one you said B2B,
so lead generation for high lifetime value. So if what they’re selling is over 15,000 lifetime or greater, you also said higher education MBA. So let’s kind of jam on that for a little bit. What type of businesses would fall into that category? The higher education? Yeah. Are you actually talking about institutions advertising or people who want to reach individuals connected institutions?
I just don’t know that I’m understanding that correctly. Oh, I gotcha. Yeah. At the institution itself. So you imagine like a local university to you who they have an MBA program that they’d like to fill up with students. LinkedIn would let you target and obviously customize for your own organization, but you can say, I want to target anyone who has a bachelor’s but doesn’t yet have a master’s or PhD who got their degree in English or journalism and has at least five years of experience in the workforce.
Oh, wow. Yeah, I can see how powerful that, that would be. A hundred percent. Okay. And then, um, along those same lines, there are many companies that are educational platforms. So, you know, we talk about the knowledge commerce industry. You and I were both in that industry. You know, sharing knowledge, teaching individuals how to up their game,
increase their skills. So could this also apply to platforms, online platforms and online companies that are teaching skills to individuals who also then need to target or want to target people who are already at a certain educational level who might not be, you know, an official institution. Oh, for sure. Yeah. And the targeting on LinkedIn is so great for so many people.
What it usually comes down to though is the cost. Yeah. Because last time we talked, I think the average cost per click on LinkedIn was six to $9. It’s now eight to 11 because you know, increased competition over time. Interesting. Okay. So it’s going up. Okay. Yeah. And I want to talk about that more in the next show too.
Okay. So, um, and then the third person obviously is recruiting, hiring. That’s an easy no brainer. So those are the three types of businesses that are really ideal to advertise on LinkedIn. We dove into your acronym, your audience message, offer your ammo acronym and making sure that as a business you have all of those nailed down before you start your ad campaign.
You talked about the importance of having like simple ads, not these fancy video ads, simple ads with images that are thumb stopping images with. Great copy. Before we kind of wrap up here, because I literally, I have so many questions for your age and I just appreciate you so much, so much being on the show and just allowing me to ask my completely uneducated LinkedIn advertising questions to you and I know there are so many people like me that just want to know more and so I’m thrilled about this before somebody starts even thinking about advertising on LinkedIn.
And just to kind of wrap up this first episode, can you just explain to us what they really need to have set up in place as far as a profile or a company page? You know what I mean? I mean, so I know we have a, we just actually started our Sweetlife company page. I’ve had my LinkedIn personal profile for, I don’t even know as long as I could have had it,
you know, years over a decade for sure. What do you need to have in place before you can even dive into this or what do you recommend? Yes, excellent question. So there are four different ad formats that you can use on LinkedIn. The main ad format that shows up in the newsfeed, that’s the one that I recommend everyone start with.
That’s the only one that requires a company page to be associated with it. The rest, you can use any of them, not in your newsfeed types of ads without a page. But what’s so interesting to me is you don’t have to make sure your pages rockstar for your ads to perform well. The only things that people see from your company page in your ad are the company name,
the logo, and the number of followers. So as long as your number of followers is not like an embarrassingly low number like ours, I’m looking at mine right now, it has 732 followers and I might go, okay, I might try to get that up before I really start hitting for the fences or anything, but as long as you’re not embarrassed by that number,
you can show ads and the vast majority of people won’t ever come to your page to check out anything else you’ve shared or really anything else about your company. They’ll do what your ad is asking them to do, which is come to my landing page and fill out my form. So don’t sweat too much over what is on your company page. Just fill it out with the basics and make sure it doesn’t look embarrassing to you and then then your ads will perform as you create the ads.
Got it. Okay, so that means I shouldn’t be running ads probably yet from my company page because I think we have three followers. Yeah, your 700 is embarrassing them by three. Well, the nice thing is you can cheat a little bit because LinkedIn released about six months ago. The ability to invite your connections so every day you can go in and invite up to,
I think it’s 25 of your connections to follow your company page every day. Go in, invite 25 people that you know are great for your target audience or just good friends. Invite them and start padding that number over time and that way you wouldn’t be embarrassed about. That’s so funny. My assistant Kelly, she’s my assistant Kelly there. Let’s just add that to your daily job tests every day.
She’s literally rolling her eyes right now while she listens to this show. She’s like, great, thanks April, but what? What I’m hearing is you don’t have to have a business page. You can still run LinkedIn ads without having a company page set up. Yup, yup. You can still run message ads which go to their inbox and on the desktop you can run both ad formats that are just hanging out over in the right rail.
One’s called text ads and one’s called dynamic ads, but you probably will want a page four, the main ad format just because it’s the best ad format for most people, but you could theoretically without, Okay. Yeah, for sure. I want to type for many more questions about that in the next show. And then just the profile in general, like a general everybody’s general LinkedIn profile.
You said few people actually come to either check out the company or the actual profile of the person running the ad, so it doesn’t seem like we have to have this rockstar profile in place either. So somebody who’s relatively new to LinkedIn or who’s really never taken the time to grow their LinkedIn connection could from what you’re saying is is correct. Do real well with ads,
just basically because that doesn’t seem to be a deciding factor on how the ads convert. Yes, and in addition to that, you can’t actually even link to the profile of the person creating the ads. So quite often we’ll have a client who they personally don’t have a profile and so to work together they set one up and it’s bare bones, I mean no picture,
barely their name, but we can still run ads for them because their company page is okay or even run some of those other ad formats that don’t require the page. So yeah, don’t let that stuff stop you from being able to run ads. Awesome. Thank you so much AIJ for being here. This is sweet life business podcast, episode number 176 all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 76 and for you guys to connect with AIG AIG, tell people where they can find you if they already know they want to dive into this. They don’t want to deal with figuring this out on their own as much information as we’re giving them here. It isn’t like having you hold their hand. Where can everybody find you? Awesome. Well,
because you are all listening to a podcast right now. I’m excited to announce. I actually just launched my own podcast about four months ago, so if you’re interested in going super deep into LinkedIn ads, just searching whatever podcast player you’re listening to right now, the LinkedIn ads show, and you’ll see a a bright chubby ginger point now yet or something. That’s how you’ll know it’s may and of course I’m really easy to find.
If you go to<inaudible> dot com our business website, if you fill out the form on any of those pages, you don’t go to a sales rep and you don’t get put into our newsletter. It just goes directly to my inbox and I’m not a sales guy, so feel free to reach out and I’m happy to email back and forth. Dude, you’re awesome.
Thank you so much, JJ. All right, you guys, thanks for listening. Screenshot this episode. If it helped you and uploaded to LinkedIn tag Aja, tag me in it. Let us know what you took away from this, what you benefited the most are white, you know what you learned. We really appreciate your feedback and sharing this show,
and we will talk to you again next week. Thanks for being here

Episode 175: How To Create An Affiliate Program To Sky Rocket Your Sales – with Laura Sprinkle

Laura Sprinkle SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join Rock Your Affiliate Program and get free access to April’s “Your Signature Offer” [$1999 value] 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for established companies with fantastic programs or services who want to increase sales as well as for new entrepreneurs who need to get the word out about your business and want to generate referrals from the get-go. 

Summary:

You’re really good at what you do, but your list of leads is small. Or… You have an amazing program, course, product, or service, and it’s time to 3x your sales. In both cases… your solution is an affiliate program. 
 
But do you create one? 
Where do you start? 
Who do you ask to become your affiliates?
How can you get them to agree? 
 
In this episode, my friend Laura Sprinkle, the mastermind behind epic launches for Amy Porterfield, Selena Soo, and Todd Herman and over 10MM in affiliate sales, dishes it all. 
 
If you want your next product launch to be your best yet? Don’t miss this show. 

Highlights:

  1. Understand epic profit potential of affiliate sales
  2. Learn to find your best referral partners 
  3. Know how to pitch partners for mutual benefits 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hey Darren, welcome back to the sweet life entrepreneur business podcast, April beach here, and we have a special treat today. You don’t need to just listen to my voice delivering business strategy. Have you been listening to this show for a while? You know that half of these episodes are me dishing out business trainings to you and the other half is when I bring in a guest and today is one of those special episodes when I have an amazing guest in the house.
So much cooler than I am and I can’t wait to dive into everything we’re talking about today on this show. But let’s first make sure that we are making the most use of your time. So this particular episode is for you. If you are an established company and you have a super amazing program or service or course or product and you want to increase sales or you’re a new business and you want to get the word out about what you do, you want to increase referrals and you want to get started strong from day one.
So in this show we’re talking about how to fast track your profit by building an affiliate program and not just any affiliate program. And that’s what’s so exciting about today’s episode because how you build your affiliate program is going to affect your brand and if you’ve been listening to the show for awhile, you know that there are three ways to increase your numbers, to increase your sales and to increase your list of leads. Number one is obviously through organic outreach in whether it’s social media or networking face to face. Number two is through ad spend in number three is through either earned media or partnerships.
We’re diving into that number three today and I’m so excited about digging into this with you. This is not only something that I know that many businesses want to do. This is something that my company and my team, we’re in the process of working through right now as we speak, so this episode couldn’t have been more timely and we’re so excited to dive in and share with you as I learned myself. Very stoked about that. So for all of the links we’re going to talk about in today’s show, please visit Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one seven five that’s where you’re going to find everything that you need and also where you’re going to find a link so that you can work directly with our guests, which you’re going to hear about how you can do that. For those you guys that are really ready to take your business to the next level, you can hear about all of that in this episode and find all those links by visiting Sweetlife podcasts.com forward slash one seven five<inaudible>. All right, you guys, welcome to suite life entrepreneur and business podcast number one 75 and I’m here with my friend Laura sprinkle.
I will tell you, I still remember the first time speaking to Laura on the phone. She was incredibly helpful and she was helping me take part in our friend Selena Sue’s business program and promoting her business program. And I was waiting in the carpool line for my kids at school waiting to pick my kids up from school. And I think Laura, you were expecting your daughter at the time.<inaudible> life was just such a different place in that I remember being like, this lady is so awesome. I can’t wait to connect with her further.
She’s incredibly helpful and these are the exact kind of people that I want and need in my life in business. So I’m super excited to finally get her here on the podcast. So let me, let me give you her official introduction, her your and then we’ll, we’ll turn it over to Laura to phase in really who she is behind the scenes. So Laura sprinkle teaches entrepreneurs how to grow their business through strategic high touch partnerships through her signature training rock, your affiliate program. She’s helped industry leaders such as Amy Porterfield,
Selena, Sue, and Todd Herman. Build their partner programs has seen over $10 million in partner revenues come in through her methods and supported thousands of partners across dozens of industries. Her motto is partnerships first, fun always, and she sprinkles that message throughout every single thing that she does. A little bit more about Laura, even though you’re going to know this for yourself by the end of this show, she’s been mentioned in Amy Porterfield’s online marketing made easy podcast and has been, it’s a featured guest expert for Selena Sue’s year long mastermind at advance and on podcasts.
So Laura, thank you so much for being on the show today. Give everybody a better introduction than me reading your bio could to you who you are behind the scenes and what it is that you actually do. Please. Thank you so much. April. I’m so, so honored to be here truly, and it’s always so funny hearing people read your bio back to you and I’m like, wow, I’m pretty cool. Yeah, I was definitely gotten a lot better over the years and it’s just so funny to think about the names that you were saying.
The people that I get to work with that I have the pleasure of supporting and they’re just real human beings behind the scenes and you get to be friends with people and they become not such a big deal to you. But then you know, hearing them out in the world and it’s like, Oh wow, this is pretty awesome. So I’m just super, super pumped to be here. And I got into all of this really because I am a people pleaser and ended up turning, you know, what could be called a flaw into my biggest win.
I mean obviously like, you know, I’m working on the people pleasing part, but really like I just love making friends with people and I’ve been able to turn that into a beautiful career, making friends with some top industry leaders. So yeah, it’s fun and you’re very, very good at it. Okay, so tell us what is your business? What do you do? So it’s really clear that people understand specifically what is your Ninja skill, your zone of genius. Yeah. So mine and just skill is,
so I’ve done, you know, you read all the, all the stats there. Actually it’s closer to $12 million now. Super exciting. So over the course of dozens of launches, um, some of which have generated millions of dollars is very exciting. I realized that every single launch, I was behind the scenes as an affiliate manager at that time and I realized, well I’m doing the same thing every time, obviously with a different flavor for every client. But I had never seen out there somebody teaching how do you create an affiliate launch or how do you create a partner program to get other people to share your work for you,
which is what I was helping clients do. And so then I created a training thing. Rock your affiliate program. Well actually even before I created the training, I created the system to use with clients, started implementing it, saw great results, started doing intensive days of people, saw great results there and consulting. And then now I have a training to teach people my exact system. So they create a core partner program. And then we have a four phase system that goes around it, which really loves people up in this beautiful way.
And I love partnerships. I think that entrepreneurship can be lonely and it can feel overwhelming to do it all on your own. And so when you can have other people promoting for you, it’s just this beautiful win-win all around. I love that. Okay. And so oftentimes those of you guys that are faithful, sweet life listeners here, we talk about three different ways to gain an audience. And then Laura, you and I chatted a little bit about this behind the scenes before we started recording. So our audience knows,
obviously you can generate organic traffic, you can run ads, which some businesses do, some businesses don’t. And there’s always this third way. And our mutual friend Cathy Hawn actually says it really well. She says, you know, when you don’t have your own audience, the best way, the fastest way to grow your business is to borrow someone else’s. And I love that. And that’s like the third way. But so many people are saying, cheese, you know, how do I actually do this?
And so what you do teaching people how to recruit affiliates to sell their program or their services that really fits into that, Hey, let’s borrow somebody else’s audience. That third way. So for those of you guys that are listening, you’re aren’t really sure kind of where getting an affiliate onboard fits into your overall marketing strategy. That’s where, that’s this third way this, you know, borrow somebody else’s audience, you know, recruit friends and friends of friends and people that love what you do in your business and know that you’re a rock to actually sell your products and your programs for you.
And so Laura, there’s a couple of like basic elementary questions. I want to make sure that we’re getting out of the way and we kind of hit the nail on the head before you dive into, you’re going to teach us about how to recruit people and the rings of recruitment, which I’m so excited about. Is there a certain definition for an affiliate or like we talked about a JV that you can explain here for those that might be really new to this type of business promotional model. Definitely. So for me,
I like to call them partners in general and for me a partner is a very broad term and it can encompass a lot of different things because oftentimes when people hear the word JV or I guess those are you know, joint venture partners, what that means, a JV or affiliate, they think it has to be this like online course launch. You know like our friends, Lena does one in reality, a partner program could encompass referrals. It could be an affiliate, it could be a joint venture, but a partner in this sense and what you’re talking about is somebody who’s going to be promoting your product,
program or service for you. And when they make a sale you are going to give them a commission. So it’s beautiful because with advertising, obviously you have to pay upfront and you’re not guaranteed a return on your investment. Whereas with an affiliate partner, a JV partner or referral partner, you’re only paying them a commission when they make a sale.
I love that. Okay, so it’s a perfect segue. It just leads us right into, okay,
great, how do we find these people? How do we find people that are interested in promoting our product,
who want to sell this for, you know, really the right reasons, usually because they believe in it or they have used this before or they believe in me as a business person and a business owner.
Can you kind of guide us through those steps of how to get people on board? Definitely, and actually first,
even before I dive into that, I want to talk about why, and we’ve already touched on this a little bit,
but again, why you would even consider this, because oftentimes the first initial thought when I say, Oh,
and then you pay them a commission is, Oh, well I don’t want to pay people my hard earned money for this thing.
When in reality, like you said, you’re borrowing somebody else’s audience, you’re cutting down the time. It takes tremendously to get a lead on board because if you were going to do that organically,
it would take awhile to build up your list or to reach more people. So you’re getting a lead on board faster.
Referrals are excellent customers because they’ve pre-framed, they’re excited about you and your offer. And it’s a faster sale because they’ve been referred.
So it’s a sale that you probably wouldn’t have had otherwise. And that is the benefit of paying that commission out saying,
thank you so much for sharing my work. Like I’m going to pay you for it. So I just want to get that out of the way first of all.
No, I’m glad you said that too. So thank you. So that’s so important as you know,
why are we doing this? And I will actually add to that that you’re so right. So we’re very picky about who we partner with as far as affiliates are.
People we know and love and trust and we love their work. Like you, we, you know,
we part with you. And I remember that, you know, as we go through and we recommend programs for our friends,
so when we are acting as the affiliate partner, not as the main seller, I will get on the phone with people that I know the same.
Listen, you really need this. I know where you are in your business, you really need this,
this is that one key that you were looking for and I endorse this, I support you in this.
And in most cases, you know we participate through that program with people that we refer. And so yes,
a hundred percent because I’m doing that work for the owner of that program, I’m calling my clients personally and saying,
Hey listen, I know you and this is going to be great for you. I won’t call everybody because it’s not great for everybody and it’s really,
you know, we do this with integrity when we see, and we know we have clients where people we worked with,
you know for a period of time and say, Hey listen, we know this is what you need.
So a hundred percent and that is worth whoever’s program that we are recommending or selling it as an affiliate partner to have me get on the phone and have my endorsement of their program to my people directly.
And that as an affiliate that is by far worth its weight in gold. You couldn’t buy that sort of endorsement with all the tea in China as having somebody personally pick up the phone or personally write out,
you know, to somebody else saying, Hey listen, I really know that this is important for you.
So I’m so glad that that you said that. Yes. All right. Okay. So anything else we need to know about like who can participate in affiliate program?
So are there any regulations behind who can participate and who can’t in certain types of affiliate programs that we should talk about here in the beginning?
I know we’ve kind of run into this in the past cause I own two companies. One of them does a lot of work in medical and so I know there’s kind of some gray area there.
Yeah, I mean I definitely am not a lawyer or expert, you know, I’ll just clarify that on that end of things.
And there are FTC regulations in place that everybody needs to be familiar with and agree to and I would always have a terms and conditions like for your partner program before you get started on recruiting.
I do know that there are certain things, yeah in the medical space or in the health space and also in,
you know for lawyers I have a client actually who’s a lawyer and so she has some, some different interesting things to be aware of.
Excuse me. When it comes to partners, one of the big things though, because most people I’m assuming that are listening or not necessarily in those spaces is you always want your partners to disclose that they are an affiliate.
Like that is super important and not only is it actually the law, which you know it is, it is also just integrity.
You’re not going to burn relationships that way. Like if I’m saying, Oh my gosh, you have to go see this movie and they go see the movie,
like that’s not a big deal. But if every time I recommend a movie to a friend, I get a thousand dollars and I don’t tell them and then they find out later like that’s going to be like,
well did you actually like that movie or were you just telling me to go see it? And so when you say upfront,
Hey, yes, go see this movie, it is the best. I wouldn’t recommend it otherwise. And I am getting commission on the back and but I wouldn’t recommend it,
you know, unless I was really behind it. Right. Yeah. I love that. Okay. So we are not attorneys talk to,
you’re an attorney if you’re in one of those strange industries that you don’t have, whether or not you can do this.
But thank you for letting me put you on the spot there. That’s what I usually say. You know,
it’s always like go talk to your attorney. But you know, again, that’s medical and legal, medical and legal are the two primary industries.
I think that that’s a case force. I wanted to make sure we made that. We talked about that upfront.
So Laura and I don’t have all the perfect legal jargon on that, but this is, this is why,
this is why for for 99 point 99% of you, this is an amazing way to go about building your business.
Okay, so how on earth when we’re thinking about reaching out to people, how do we find people that are the right people?
Because we don’t want to just find everybody, right? We want to find the right people that are invested in take the time to pay attention to what it is they’re selling.
And actually am I asking too much for somebody to want to love what they’re selling of mine? Is that too much or at least believe in it?
So talk to us about how we find these people. Your rings of recruitment. Yeah, for sure.
So it is definitely not too much, I would say. So there are four qualities of an amazing partner and first and foremost,
their values need to be aligned with your values. Like you need to want to be aligned with them as a human,
as a brand, like in the world. I too often see like when people first started thinking about like,
okay, who can promote my offer? The first thing they go to is how big is their audience?
That’s like the first thing I think about or you know, what can they do for me? How much money can we make it together?
Now a proper partner program can make a crap ton of money and you can’t want to make money together.
Like that is a huge benefit of it. And at the same time, if the values aren’t aligned,
you’re going to burn relationships so quickly you’re going to get the wrong people on board. I actually had a client who,
it wasn’t even like their values were totally unaligned or anything, but she refer to her community in a specific way,
had a very religious partner come on board and send his people to her program and they were really offended by how she referred to her whole.
So it was just such a mismatch for her. So anyway, first of all, make sure that when you’re writing down your list of potential partners that your values are aligned.
Oh, the second thing that the partner has is they know you and they know that your program gets great results.
So exactly what you said. They love you and they love your program and they know that it’s doing amazing things in the world.
And then they also have an audience that can be served by your program. They’re not just like knocking on doors down the street.
They already have a relationship with people that can be served through your offer. I love that. It’s so true.
Right? Okay. Yes. Not, not just anybody. The right people. Exactly. So those are the four qualities and then the rings,
I’m recruitment. So the intermodal string are people that already have all of these qualities. So they know you,
they trust you, they know your product gets free results. They know that they have people there, honestly,
probably already referring people to you. Even if you don’t have a formal referral program in place, they’ve maybe sent you a couple of people or they’ve asked you about a partner program.
Like they are just right for the pickup. They’re excited. They’re willing to shout it out from the rooftops.
So they’re probably current students, former students, current clients for our clients, really close colleagues and friends and that is always where you should start again.
People start thinking about, Ooh, partnerships. That’s really cool. I need to recruit somebody that has a list of 300,000 people.
No you don’t. I’ve seen with our friends, we met some of the top partners on earlier board or people with smaller audiences that will go all in and get on those calls just like you mentioned.
Absolutely. Yeah, a hundred percent so that’s the, that’s the first ring and us. Those are the people I’ve write down first on your list or as you think of them,
but market one or something. The next phase of people is they know you but they need to know you better or they need to know.
They need you to just learn a little bit more about your product that you’re going to be having as part of your partner program.
When I say product, I mean it could be service, it could be physical product, it could be any kind of a product.
This works across industries and potentially these people are former students of a different product or service or their colleagues that you have a relationship with.
But you know, you wouldn’t consider them like super close. They’re not already knocking on your door asking you to partner with you,
but you have some sort of a relationship with. And I’ll talk about what to do with those people in a moment.
And then the next layer of people, and there are a couple more layers in between there, but the next layer of people are,
again, they already are aligned with your values. You know that you would want to quote unquote be seen with them in public because that’s what a partnership is and they just don’t really know you yet.
And this could be specific people like it could be names that you’re like, Oh, this person is on my dream list.
Or it could also be categories of people. So let’s say that you are a chiropractor. This is like a very broad example.
But like if you’re a chiropractor and you think who else is serving my audience? You know, maybe you write down like acupuncturists,
Wisconsin. Absolutely. Personal trainers. Massage therapists. A nutritionist. Okay, got it. Yeah, exactly.
So that would be like the categories of people. So let’s talk about what you’re actually going to do with those people.
So in that first, in our own string, your very first step is to create what I call a partner promo page.
So on this page you’re going to want to have information about your program. You’re going to want to have information about your commission structure.
So what percentage are you offering? It’s like a sales page before your partner program. Like why do you believe that they have an audience that could be served through this?
What’s in it for them? What’s in it for their audience? And you’re going to invite them. And honestly,
I would keep it simple. So when you ask me like what is your, what’s your pitch tumble it be a human.
It’s scary. It’s scary to go out there. And I do have templates, I do. And at the same time,
the more that you can genuinely come from a place of like this is a win win. And let’s partner together,
the better you’re going to do there. I love that. So just really you’re just saying, just create a page that says this is what I do,
this is why I’ve invited you. This is why I think that you would be a special partner and why I think this would be really helpful to your audience.
So super authentic and then of course talk about the numbers as well. Exactly, exactly. And we often will break things down into,
I mean there’s a lot of different frameworks for this, but there’s like the gems test or there’s the disc method,
but you know, it’s like what’s going to be fun in it for them? What are the specific details?
What are the numbers? Who else has promoted? Like what are your testimonials? Like, Oh you know,
what impact are they going to make? So all the different kinds of ways that everybody’s going to benefit is what we love to put on that page.
And again, I want to be clear, you’re only sending us out and you’re only inviting that inner ring.
You know, maybe some of ring too that just needed like a little bit more information potentially to get on board and and to figure out why this is going to serve their audience or how so the next ring of people that you already know but need a little bit more information,
like you’re not going to just go in for the kill obviously, but you’re not going to go ask them to marry you right now.
Maybe you’ve been on a couple of dates, but like you could go on a few more before you really popped the question and so for those people,
you’re probably friends with them on Facebook, stalk them a little bit. What are they into right now?
What do they, what are they passionate about? What projects do they have going on? How can you support them first with the caveat,
huge caveat,